JP6804814B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, in pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on whether or not a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a display device to stop and display the symbol in a manner according to the lottery result. .. When the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device to generate a big hit game state. In this type of gaming machine, a hold display is performed for the number of waits for execution of the lottery, and a notice effect for changing the mode of the hold display is executed, and a variable display of the symbol is displayed in advance by changing the mode of the hold display. It has been proposed to show the degree of expectation of a big hit against (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-158559

In the above-mentioned game machine, although the expectation for the big hit game is raised by changing the mode of the hold display , there is still room for ingenuity in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with devised production .

Based on the variable display means for displaying the variation of the symbol information, the random number acquisition means for acquiring the lottery random number based on the establishment of the start condition, and the lottery random number acquired by the random number acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. The lottery result of the lottery means is provided with a lottery means for performing a lottery and a profit-giving state control means for controlling a profit-giving state for giving a profit to a player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit. In the gaming machine that displays the symbol information in a variable manner by the variable display means and stops and displays the specific symbol information when is a hit, the start is performed after the random number for lottery is acquired by the random number acquisition means. A random number storage means that stores the lottery random numbers until the conditions are satisfied and waits for the execution of the lottery by the lottery means based on the lottery random numbers up to a predetermined upper limit, and the lottery by the random number storage means. A hold display means for displaying the storage of random numbers as a hold display in a predetermined mode, and a variation capable of displaying the hold display as a variation correspondence display at a predetermined position when the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to change the mode of the response display means and the variation response display displayed by the variation response display means, and to execute the variation response notice effect suggesting the expectation of the hit depending on the mode of the variation response display changed. When the variation display means performs the variation display of the symbol information, the continuous variation effect of displaying the symbol information in a variable manner as if the symbol information fluctuates a plurality of times is performed. and a continuous variation demonstration execution unit capable of executing, the variation corresponding announcement attraction is that performing the continuous variation effect is determined by the continuously variable demonstration execution means in the variable display during the execution of the symbol information When the variation-corresponding display displayed by the variation-corresponding display means is made unrecognizable after the display of the special display mode to be shown is started and the unrecognizable variation-corresponding display is recognized again, the recognition is performed. The display is displayed at the predetermined position in the same mode as the variation-corresponding display that was displayed before the disabling, and after the display in the same mode, the display in a mode different from the same mode is displayed at the predetermined position. a first pattern that will be capable of displaying at, the predetermined said fluctuations corresponding display form of being displayed at the position without disabling recognizing the variation corresponding display displayed by said variation corresponding display means The second pattern, which is different from the first pattern, which can be displayed by changing to a different mode, Ah is, the display of the different embodiments are viewable in said first pattern, the even being capable displayed on the display of the different embodiments are viewable in a second pattern, wherein in said first pattern A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of periods during which the fluctuation response display displayed by the fluctuation response display means is unrecognizable.

In the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine with a devised production .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame and the door frame are opened with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the top. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the button unit and looked at from the bottom. It is a top view of the dish unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 39. FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. 39. (A) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the door of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit of the door. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 42 (b) is a sectional view taken along line DD of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and (b) is a perspective view from the back with the upper plate ball removing unit attached to the plate unit base. It is a seen perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball pulling unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball removal unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the payout blade in a payout device. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit below the side unit and above the side unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and above the side unit as viewed from behind. It is a perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right-hand flow path in the center accessory by the cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a). It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back box and the like seen from the front of the game board, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower and rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back and lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit and looked at from the front together with the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back bottom rear second decorative body. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the back together with the 1st decorative body after the back bottom and the 2nd decorative body after the back bottom. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the movable production unit after the back side from the front. (A) is a front view of the rear-back movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a back view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit by rotating the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-lower rear second decorative body together from the normal state. It is a front view of the lower rear second decorative body with the second decorative surface facing the front, and (c) is the front view of the lower rear first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state moved to the moving end on the left side of the view. In (d), in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the first decorative body after lower back and the second decorative body after lower back are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after lower back faces the front. It is a front view of the state, (e) is the state of (d), the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated to open the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom, and after the back bottom. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the lower back are facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view which shows in the state which it moved to the right end position, (c) is the front view which shows in the state which developed the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body from the state of (b). Is. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is a disassembled back-up and middle movable production unit for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative body unit seen from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative body unit viewed from behind by disassembling it. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decoration unit from the front, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). (A) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in a normal state, and (b) shows a pair of back-up middle decoration units with the back-up middle first decoration unit half open to the outside. It is a front view, and (c) is a front view which shows the pair of back-up middle decoration unit of the back-up middle decoration unit in a state of being completely opened to the outside. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from behind. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle rotation unit of the back upper middle drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is the back upper middle rotation unit of the back upper middle drive unit disassembled from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the movable production unit in the back upper middle from the front roughly. (A) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decorative body unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back movable effect unit as seen from the front by disassembling other than the lower back front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back movable production unit as seen from behind by disassembling other than the lower back front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back decorative body unit of the lower back front movable production unit as viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back front decorative body unit of the under-back front movable effect unit as viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows outline of the elevating mechanism in the front lower back movable production unit. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and (b) is an enlarged view of the unit elevating pin portion in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is an explanatory view which expands (b) further and shows the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit. (A) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). In the back-bottom-rear movable production unit of the back unit, the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-lower rear second decorative body are rotated together in a normal position to show the second decorative surface facing the front. It is a front view. Movable after the back of the back unit The first decorative body after the back of the unit and the second decorative body after the back are closed, and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back is facing the front. A state in which the first decorative body on the back upper left and the second decorative body on the back upper left of the back upper left movable production unit are slid and moved to approximately the center in the horizontal direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the rear lower rear movable production unit is hinged and opened to open the second decorative surface of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body. At the same time, rotate the hinge rotation of the back top left second decorative member of the back top left movable production unit to open it, and open the back top left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back top left second decorative member. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the first decorative surface after the back bottom of the movable effect unit is rotated and opened to open the second decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative surface after the back bottom. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end of the front view. In the back unit, the back upper middle decorative body unit is moved to the position of the descending end of the back upper middle movable effect unit, and the back upper middle decorative body unit is extended diagonally in the front view counterclockwise direction. It is a front view of the game board which shows in a rotated state. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to a position in a half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a position in a fully open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back lower front movable production unit back lower front decorative body unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the front lower back first decorative body is hinged and raised above the lower back lower front second decorative body from the state of FIG. 140. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the effect pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for the type details of the pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for the lottery process for reach, and (C) is a lottery process for the type of jackpot. It is a design determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the monochrome advance notice execution processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an area occupancy pattern determination table used to determine an area occupancy pattern in executing a monochrome advance notice effect. This is an example showing an area in which the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. This is an example of the effect when the monochrome notice effect is executed. This is an example of the effect when the monochrome notice effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hold notice execution processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. This is a hold notice determination table used to determine a hold notice pattern in the execution of the hold notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the mode change effect execution process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of the mode change effect determination table used for determining the mode change effect pattern in the execution of the mode change effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the mode change suggestion effect execution processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect execution processing at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect pattern determination table used to determine a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect pattern in executing a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect. This is an example of the effect when the mode change effect is executed. This is an example of the effect when the mode change suggestion effect is executed. This is an example of the effect when the effect at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which connect both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown in a box shape) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) housed in the payout control board box 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal taxiway and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board box 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. 15A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to the left and right center on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, they are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled on the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a quadrangular upper fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 15B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward from the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. A flat rising portion 72 that rises, a hinge pin 73 under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass through. It is provided with a horizontal discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are further provided with a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 from the protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. ..

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. 16 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 (b) is an outside view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is designed to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 63 are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

Then, in this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction of moving to the right, the right surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protruding portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 is locked. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be in a held (locked) state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 18B. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) on the outer frame side, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk that it will be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has a quadrangular outer shape and a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the front right lower part of the door frame base unit 100. It includes a handle unit 500 that can be attached through the plate unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear. A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted on the front right corner of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And, the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. It includes an upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, which are arranged vertically and bulge forward to store the game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. A plate-shaped plate unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and can display an image. The effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player, the plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and the right side of the front view upper plate 201. A lower right door effect unit 270 having a lower right door rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, a transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right door effect unit 270 from the front side, and an upper plate. An upper plate ball removing unit 310 for pulling out the game ball stored in 201 to the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball removing unit 320 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and a game hall. A ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210. It mainly includes an upper plate top decorative member 340 that can be decorated by luminescence.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 and a unit base, which are partially translucent and are attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. A top decorative member 370 that is mounted in the center of the left and right on the front of the 360 and has translucency that bulges forward, and a top speaker that is mounted inside the top decorative member 370 and outputs high-pitched sound ( (Not shown), and a decorative substrate 380 on the door frame, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 410 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 and a unit. A translucent left side decorative member 420 that is attached to the front surface of the base 410 and whose upper end extends to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420. The left speaker unit 430, which is mounted at the upper left corner of 3 and has a left speaker (not shown), and the door frame, which is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. It includes a left decorative substrate 440 and.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 460 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 that is attached to the front side of the base 460 and whose upper end extends to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame in front of the right side decorative member 470. A right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted at a position in the upper right corner of 3, and a plurality of LEDs mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. It is equipped with a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which the speaker is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by the player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And have. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted on the handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142), which is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and the handle body 502. It includes a stop button that can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open. It mainly includes a 522 and a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a penetrating ball passage that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 which is open to the rear on the right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, and the full tank. A foul that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the front view of the ball receiving port 528 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 200 while discharging the game balls received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the 210c.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and has an open rear side, and a rear side of the unit main body 542. A box-shaped unit cover 544 with an open front side that can be detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520, and an upper plate of the plate unit 200 that opens toward the front. A ball advance entrance 546 in which the game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball discharge port 548 in which the game ball that has entered the ball advance entrance 546 can be released and is open rearward, and a ball advance entrance. The game ball that has entered the 546 can be discharged, and the ball discharge port 550 that opens forward at the lower side of the ball advance entrance 546 is provided. Further, although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing the game balls entering from the ball advance entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entry. It is provided with a switching mechanism for switching the game ball entering from the mouth 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and on both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. It includes a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and viewed from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC cross section in FIG. 39. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of a unit enlarged.

Further, FIG. 42A is a front view of the lower right door effect unit of the dish unit, FIG. 42B is a right side view of the lower right door effect unit, and FIG. 43A is a lower right door effect unit. It is a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door production unit seen from the back. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 49A is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the lower right door effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 49B is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward.

Further, FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) shows the upper plate ball removing unit attached to the plate unit base. It is a perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53A is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is an exploded perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the front.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 that stores a game ball that is discharged from the payout device 830 and is to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly, and the upper plate 201 The upper plate main body 212 forming the lower plate 202, and the lower plate main body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 202. ..

Further, the plate unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the front side and the lower side of the effect operation unit. The plate unit cover 260 attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, the lower right door effect unit 270 located on the right side of the effect operation unit 220 and attached to the right front side of the plate unit base 210, and the lower right effect unit of the door. A game ball that covers the front side of the 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 and is attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate main body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the ball to the lower plate 202, and a lower plate ball removing unit for discharging the game ball, which is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 and is stored in the lower plate 202, downward. It is equipped with 320.

Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and is a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. The upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated by light emission, and the upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the front left side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260, can irradiate light forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 equipped with a plurality of LEDs and the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the door are attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 toward the front. The dish unit right decorative board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and the upper dish front decorative board 233, the upper dish rear decorative board 235, and the upper dish which are attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 and will be described later. Liquid crystal board 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, effect button decorative board 251, effect button pressing sensor 258, lower right relay board 281 of the door, dish unit left decorative board 345, and dish unit right decorative board 346 and game board 5. A dish unit relay board 347 that relays the connection with the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) is provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit base 210 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 210a and the upper plate ball supply port 210a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 210b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower plate ball supply port 210c penetrating the front and rear at the lower center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear, and a lower plate. The ball supply port 210c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 210d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a square inner circumference penetrating back and forth on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d in front view, and a receiver protruding forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. The handle insertion port 210h, the cylinder insertion port 210i that penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view and the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the front view of the tubular lower plate ball supply port 210c. A notch 210j, which is notched from the rear end to the front on the side surface of the above, is provided.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward on the left side of the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is open upward and rearward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is open only to the left and rearward on the right end side of the front view and through which game balls can circulate. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowered as a whole. More specifically, with the upper plate main body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is a game ball from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feeding port 210d.

Further, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal ground fitting 212b extending from the center of the left and right to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground fitting 212b is electrically grounded, and the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a plan view trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 214 is provided with a ball extraction hole 214a that penetrates vertically through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the ball extraction hole 214a. doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls can be moved downward from the plate unit 200 from the ball extraction hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center of the left and right in the front view, and the mounting base unit 220A. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C mounted on the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in the front view are provided.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220A of the effect operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 whose upper side is open, and on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper end is open so that the touch unit 200B can be accommodated from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. The front lens member 232, the upper plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the unit cover covering the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232. It is provided with a translucent upper plate front decorative member 234 attached to the 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and the upper side of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 and the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. From the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235, which is sandwiched between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a translucency and attached to the unit cover 224, and the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. A linear light emitting lens member 237 that can guide the light of the above plate and emit light linearly at the upper end, a tubular button mounting member 238 that is attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and a button mounting member. It is equipped with an upper plate ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined from the substantially center of the front and rear to the front side so as to be lowered toward the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated to the left and right. It includes two through-holes 230b and a tubular tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. The inner circumference of the through port 230b is formed in a quadrangular shape. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow toward the downward direction (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the tubular receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is downward with respect to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It slopes and extends forward as it goes toward. Further, the tubular receiving portion 230c extends with the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides inclined so that the lower ends (tips) of the tubular receiving portion 230c are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is open upward and is separated from each other in the front-rear direction from the front left and right ends of the accommodating recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. The lateral support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that are separated from each other to the left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a and project upward in a columnar shape, and the accommodation recess 231a from the left and right centers on the front and rear ends of the bottom surface. It is provided with a central support protrusion 231d projecting upward and two receiving portions 231e projecting in a pyramidal shape so as to narrow from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a downward to the left and right. ..

Further, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f, which is circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a on the left side in front view and the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C and a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodating recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. It is provided with a notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a plan view shape in which a quadrangle extending to the left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle are combined. Further, in the accommodating recess 231a, the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is formed lower than the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodating recess 231a and are formed so as to be insertable into the tubular damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire lateral support pin 231b is formed longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the tubular damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the accommodation recess 231a. The impact portion 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer circumference. The two receiving portions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The outer peripheral wall on the front side of the abutting portion 231e extends substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. And extend. Further, the abutment portion 231e extends with the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the perpendicularity of the surface of the accommodating recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the impact receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the impact receiving portion 231e is inserted into the through port 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the impact receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LED 235b for luminescent decoration of the linear light emitting lens member 237. ..

The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and has a light receiving portion 237a and a light receiving portion 237a arranged above the plurality of peripheral edge LEDs 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped linear light emitting portion 237b which is continuously fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodating recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to guide the light received by the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be made to emit light (linearly).

The upper plate ball removing button 239 is slidably attached up and down by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge (pull out) the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, an outer peripheral surface of two abutment portions 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and a mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the abutment portion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the tubular receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a bends downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving portion 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the tubular receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the abutment portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner circumference inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the impact receiving portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, the force from the impact portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. ..

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper portion, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242, and an upper side of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 with an open surface, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 to display an image, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped ground fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer periphery, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the upper surface of the ground fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above and passes through a base member 243. It is provided with a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to the 240.

Further, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on its rear end surface in a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, and also lower. It is provided with a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 or the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodating recess 213a of the unit case 231, and the lower case 240 is formed so as to be accommodating in the accommodating recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped protruding portion 240b protruding from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a in a trapezoidal shape, and each protruding portion 240b having an outer diameter of a damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c, which have the same inner shape as the above and are partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are formed apart from each other in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d and the vibration device mounting portion 240e arranged near the board mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibration device 242 is mounted are provided.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided at substantially the center of the upper and lower sides of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c that penetrates vertically at the tip of the extension portion 243b at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 and has a large diameter counterbore on the upper side, and a screw hole 243c formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. It is provided with a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can be passed through the tip side of the lateral support pin 231b of the unit case 231 than the tapered portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. It is formed to a size that cannot be passed through.

The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is strong against impact and hard to break, a transparent capacitance type sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protrude.

Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motor 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

Further, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from above through the touch panel 246. Then, by displaying an image such as a button on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and touching the touch panel 246 as if the player operates the button of the image, the button of the image can be operated.

Further, since the touch unit 220B has a preventive water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. It can be prevented and the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is a cylindrical unit body 250 mounted on the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a bottom of the unit body 250. It includes an effect button decorative board 251 arranged on the side and having an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decorative board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the tubular button base 253, which is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from above and up and down, and the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and the button base 253 is attached upward. A spring member 254 that urges, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide the light from the LED of the effect button decorative substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute particles arranged above the light guide member 255. A sheet-shaped diffuser lens member 256 provided with various prisms, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffuser lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an effect button decorative substrate 251 attached to the upper surface. It is provided with an effect button pressing sensor 258 that detects the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

The unit body 250 includes three mounting pieces 250a attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and a flange-shaped shelf portion 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. A pair of through-holes 250c that penetrate the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface are provided.

The button base 253 has a tubular lower cylinder portion 253a inserted into the inner circumference of the shelf portion 250b, a conical upper cylinder portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower cylinder portion 253a, and an upper portion. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b so that the lower end can penetrate the through opening 250c of the unit body 250 and protrudes outward from the lower end and can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. The pair of engaging claws 253c having the above and the upper cylinder 253b project radially outward shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

As shown in the figure, the spring member 254 is a coil spring. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d in the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted to the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253 to the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253. It is provided with a plurality of columnar light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decorative substrate 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

In this button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit body 250 due to the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are the unit body. By engaging with the lower surface of the 250, further ascent is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 and is moved up. The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the descending end.

Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by emitting the LED of the effect button decoration board 251. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be light-emitting and decorated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of the production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B from the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. A gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the washer of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and are upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly larger than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the lateral support pin 231b side. It protrudes upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface are below. A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on both the left and right sides.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted from above in the pyramidal tubular receiving portion 230c that is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving portion 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is mounted on the mounting base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodating recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear along the rear side of the touch unit 220B near the game area 5a. It is exposed in a band shape). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about ⅔ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. A rear decorative member 236 for the upper plate is arranged behind the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, the upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. Further, the button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the player can be entertained by presenting the image (directed image) through the transparent touch panel 246.

By displaying an image imitating an operation button as an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and making it possible to accept touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246, the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 during the production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by a plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B can be operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. It can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) by the vibration device 242 during the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibration device 242 is applied to the fingers and hands of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, it is possible to surprise the player as if he / she is operating the operation button of the image even though he / she is operating the operation button of the image. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is made to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 are disliked to lack an operation feeling compared to the actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246, but the upper plate effect button 257 actually presses the operation. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward and is provided with the upper plate 201, the game is played even when the effect is not performed using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that a person will hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, the elasticity of the damper 222 even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or an impact (load) acts from above, it is transmitted to the damper 222 into which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the accommodation recesses 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support projection 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B acts directly from the touch unit 220B to the unit case 231 without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent so that the center thereof moves downward due to the load from the central support projection 231d. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. As the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a bends, a pair of abutment portions 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a descend. Then, when the impact portion 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the impact portion 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the contact unit 220B The impact will be transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramidal shape that narrows downward, from the abutting portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. In this way, by the time the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the structure for absorbing the impact is arranged in multiple layers, so that the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230 can be made less likely to be damaged by the impact.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B and the touch effect using the touch panel 246 are enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the game state, the decorative LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 causes the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b) to emit light. be able to. By luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, as in the case of the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. It is arranged at a position higher than the upper surface of the touch unit 220B, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 and the game ball flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262) when exposed to the outside air in the upper plate 201. , It is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right, and the center of the left and right bulges forward to form a shell shape that is open to the rear. .. The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 which is opened forward at substantially the center of the left and right and whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. The lower plate covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 that is arranged on the left side of the front view of the lower plate opening 261. The speaker grill 263 that transmits the sound from the speaker, the plate unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged above the speaker grill 263 and is light-emittingly decorated by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and the lower plate opening 261 are arranged on the right side of the front view. A handle opening 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 and covering the lower side of the lower plate body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right sides. It includes a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 up and down and is closed by the lower plate ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal having a plurality of holes in the metal plate.

The surface of the dish unit cover 260 on the left side when viewed from the front is formed to have a smooth feel, whereas the surface on the right side is formed to have a rugged feel. Further, the right side of the front view has substantially overall translucency.

When the dish unit cover 260 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are formed at intervals that can be grasped with one hand. As a result, when the player touch-operates the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower covering portion 262. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm, respectively. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined by about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. As a result, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 by the player's hand.

[3-1f. Lower right door production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the lower right effect unit 270 of the door of the plate unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. It is equipped with a spherical door lower right rotating body 270A that is luminescent and decorated. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 which is attached so as to close the escape port 210 g at the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and the unit base 271. The lower right drive motor 272 of the door, the drive gear 273 fixed to the rotating shaft of the lower right door drive motor 272, the driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and the driven gear 274. It includes a shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

Further, the lower right door effect unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the lower right rotary body 270A of the door from the driven gear 274, and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the bearing member 276 on the rotary body side and the lower right door. The base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the side of the rotating body 270A opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the front view of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and a decorative member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and on the front side. A lower right base decorative board 280 equipped with a plurality of LEDs, a lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a lower right base decorative board 280 of the door, and a door described later. A lower right relay board 281 for a door that relays the connection between the lower right rotary body decorative board 291 and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided.

The lower right rotating body 270A of the door constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. It includes a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a about the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a hemispherical shell-like surface having a metallic luster and a band decoration 285b extending in a circumferential direction, and a heart shape arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. It is equipped with a heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a hemispherical shell-like surface having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected to each other.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk-shaped lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 having a plurality of LEDs on both sides and a center of the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. The cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the lower right of the door and extends perpendicular to the surface of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door, extends perpendicular to the surface of the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door, and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293 of the above is provided. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right relay board 281 of the door and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door is inserted inside the second fixed shaft member 293.

Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, and is a flat plate and an annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 that is attached to the reflector base 294 and opens outward in the axial direction in an annular shape, and a hexagonal center that is attached to the reflector base 294 through the ring of the first reflector 295. It is provided with a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface thereof, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped ribs extending radially.

The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, and a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other so that they can rotate relative to each other.

The unit base 271 has an annular ring portion 271a arranged behind the lower right rotating body 270A of the door and a flat plate shape forward from a portion diagonally upper right in front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer circumference of the ring portion 271a. 271b of the first protruding piece 271b protruding forward, 271c of the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and 271c of the second protruding piece. It is provided with a bearing groove 271d, which is recessed in a U shape from the front end to the rear and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The lower right door drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b with the rotation shaft penetrating. The driven gear 274 is formed to have a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b protruding from the mounting portion 275a in a tubular shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door rotating body 270A interposed therebetween. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49 (a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 49 (b)). (See) and can be detected respectively.

The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door drive motor 272 according to the gaming state, and stops the heart decoration 285c so as to face forward. Depending on whether or not it is present, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the door lower right effect unit 270, since the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is attached so as not to rotate, the door right during the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A. When the lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 (LED) is made to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door moves as the lower right rotating body 270A of the door rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the first reflector 295 and the second Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door is light-emitting and decorated as if the light is blinking without blinking the LED of the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 of the door. The lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be rainbow-colored and decorated by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes a hemispherical and transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the door lower right effect unit 270. , The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the front view of the dish unit cover 260, and the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301 penetrating back and forth to the locking unit 700. A cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted is provided.

The effect unit cover 300 has a container-like shape with an open rear portion as a whole and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is light-emittingly decorated by the door lower right base decorative substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decorative substrate 346. Illuminated by.

[3-1h. Precision ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the plate unit base 210 from the front side and rearward. A cover 311 having an open vertical box shape and an insertion port 311a through which an extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the plate unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at a position at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member. The 313 is provided with a first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate ball removing button 239 in the upward direction.

Further, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the upper plate ball feed port 210d of the plate unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. The upper plate ball pulling slider 316, which is arranged between the 315 and the dish unit base 210 and is attached so as to be able to move up and down by the rear base member 315, and the press transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper plate ball pulling slider 316, and the upper dish ball pulling It includes a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a extending parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and attached to the cover 311 and a pair of extending flat plates extending forward from both the left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protrusion 312b, the shaft support 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are locked. It is equipped with a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The press transmission member 313 has a horizontally long columnar shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. The upper extension piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b in a flat plate shape, and the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can come into contact with the extension piece 313c. The lower extension piece 313d extending downward from the right end of the front view on the lower surface of the rear extension piece 313b and the first spring protruding downward from the lower side near the left end of the front view of the shaft portion 313a. It includes a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward toward the rear, and the lower end thereof can be brought into contact with the upper plate ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape parallel to the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210 and a front surface of the base portion 315a separated from each other to the left and right. The slider support portion 315b that slidably supports both the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316 and the upper end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a are opened forward at positions corresponding to the upper portion of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to flow.

Further, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously from the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward, and the lower end is curved rearward with the first taxiway 315d. The L-shaped second taxiway 315e, which extends downward from the lower side of the first taxiway 315d, then extends to the left in front view, the left end is open to the left, and the entire is open to the rear, and the second The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that the two sides are surrounded by the flat plate-shaped passage lid 315f that closes the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the taxiway 315e and the L-shaped second taxiway 315e. It includes an opening 315g that penetrates the base portion 315a, and a spring locking portion 315h that projects forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

The L-shaped second taxiway 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 50B, the left end of the second taxiway 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the tubular lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second taxiway 315e The lower plate ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper plate ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front from the center of the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends upward to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and allows the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313 to come into contact with the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmission portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring engagement unit projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and engaging the lower end of the second spring member 317. It is provided with a stop portion 316d.

In the upper plate ball removing unit 310, the upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 on the right end side in the front view in the state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper inlet 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper plate ball removal unit 310 presses the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the press transmission member 313, the upper plate ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper plate ball removal slider 316 with which the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

When the countersunk ball pulling slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first taxiway The 315d side is in a state of communicating with the second taxiway 315e side. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first taxiway 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second taxiway 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 316 and the upper plate ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It can be restored to its original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower plate main body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a corresponding to the extraction hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower plate ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob portion 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. It includes a member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is open against the urging force of the spring member 324.

The opening 321a of the lower plate ball removing base 321 is formed at a position to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower plate ball removing base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower plate ball removing base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 is provided with a holding protrusion 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in the front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower plate ball removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that project from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can grip the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding protrusions 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses them toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b closes to hold the holding protrusions 322a and the pair of holdings. The claw 325b is kept closed. When the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side in this state, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened and the holding of the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower plate ball removing unit 320, when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right side in the front view, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower plate main body 214. The game ball located in the lower plate 202 does not come out downward from the ball extraction hole 214a, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 202.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball extraction hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out below the plate unit 200 through the ball extraction hole 214a and the opening 321a, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, slightly operate the knob 323 to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b and release the holding protrusion 322a, and the urging force of the spring member 324 causes the slide lid 322 to slide to the right. Then, the ball extraction hole 214a is closed. By operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320 in this way, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 and to remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end of the front view and has translucency, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 and can be operated by the player behind the ball lending button 332. It is provided with a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

When the ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 332, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the lent amount are returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1k. Upper plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the center of the left and right at the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in a strip shape to the left and right. It includes a 340a and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b which is attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the upper surface.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 can make the upper plate top lens 340a emit light in a band shape by emitting the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b. Since the upper plate top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decorative member is similar to the light emitting decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating the 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 is enjoyed and the interest is suppressed from being lowered. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effect of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment has the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game ball on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the game ball in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by driving in, a band shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the upper plate top decorative member 340, and the like can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view). It is possible to notice the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from the outside of the plate, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the effect of an image or the like is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, so that the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 causes the player to emit light. It is possible to make the presentation of the effect noticeable, to entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the player is allowed to play in the game area 5a and to produce the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be bothered. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. By causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It can be noticed, and the player can be entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of an opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may be anxious, and the player may not be able to concentrate on either of them, which may reduce the interest, but the game state (chance). Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and the game in the game area 5a is enjoyed. At the same time, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and not bored.

Further, since the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player under the game area 5a is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to be seen by other players next to or behind. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be entertained only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and deteriorating the interest by being looked into by another player, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light when the effect is presented by the 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member and the like can be made more noticeable as compared with the case where the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a dot shape. Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make it easier to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc., and it is interesting to enjoy the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, etc. It can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, the light emission mode is different from that of other light emitting decorations, and it is possible to reduce misidentification as light emission of the light emitting decoration. It is possible to surely notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side of the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of view, and the light emitted from the linear light emitting lens member and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, an effect operation unit 200 having an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is hit in the game area 5a. Since the player who checks the amount of the game ball to be inserted turns his / her gaze at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it is easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from the lower side, the effect unit 200 is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely draw the player's attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the production by the operation unit 200 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, the player can surely pay attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the touch panel 246 is provided in the effect operation unit 200, in addition to the image effect, the player can also perform the effect of operating the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various effects. By having the player operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the production, and the player can actively entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feed unit 540 (ball launcher 680). It is arranged along the guiding passage portion 212a to be fed, and the upper plate ball removing button 239 for operating the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guiding passage portion 212a and the guiding passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball required for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since it is placed at a higher position than the touch unit 220B and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 can be exposed to the outside air on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration exciter 242, the number of touch units 220B is plural (two). Since it is mounted on the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A while sandwiching the damper 222, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and damped by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Therefore, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is used for the player. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of the 246, to entertain the player with the touch operation of the touch panel 246, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, and suggests the timing to operate the touch panel 246. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by a plurality of dampers 222, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from the upper side and an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 will be used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce the damage to the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage to the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. If the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch unit 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is being operated by vibrating the player's finger, it is possible to give a sufficient feeling of operation, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to correspond to various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing his interest by various productions. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is equipped with a touch panel 246, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch, as compared with the conventional pressing button. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, a wider variety of operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is mounted so as to be immovable upward and downward with respect to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231), and the touch unit 220B is provided by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, so that the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B which is thought to not move is vibrated according to the game state. The vibration caused by the device 242 can surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, it is strong by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates the touch panel 246 at a position different from the position to be operated, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is incorrect. This makes it possible for the player to perform the correct operation, and it is possible to entertain the operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be done. Therefore, by controlling each vibrating device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further feeling of operation and greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 sandwiched between them. Therefore, the impact from the upper side can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c into which the projecting portion 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. The impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the impact portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the impact portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the impact portion 231e (unit case). 231) Impacts and loads from the side are transmitted diagonally to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. It will be disassembled in the vertical direction, and the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend will be reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above, the impact and the like can be effectively damped by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 55 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open to the front side, and to the front surface of the unit main body 522. It includes a flat plate-shaped lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. The passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 which is open to the rear on the right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. It has.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 528, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 530 that receives the game ball (foul ball) and the game ball that is open forward at the lower right corner of the front view and are received by the full tank ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 are released. It also includes a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the dish unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed by the unit body 522 and the lid member 524 between the full tank ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharging port 532, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, and a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 522, are movable. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 535 that detects rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533, and a spring 536 that urges the movable piece 534 toward the center side of the storage passage 533.

In this foul cover unit 520, if the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 533 has a certain amount of space. The number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect, and urge the lower plate 202 to be filled up.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 526 on the rear side of the unit main body 522, and the taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 to which the working protrusion 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway door member 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing portion 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the taxiway door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 ) Can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. It is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the lock unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 on the rear side along the upper side and the left side in the front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out game balls to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body that is openably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame 4 is front and rear on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604. The cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the bass speaker of the board unit 900, which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. The connection opening 606 that faces the front and the circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 forward. And have.

Further, the main body frame 4 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end. The rear extension portion 608 is provided. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. It includes a mounting portion 610.

Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. It is provided with a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates up and down at the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The rear part of the shaped plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 is inserted. The lower hinge hole 644 for the door frame for supporting the shaft and the lower hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend rearward from the left end and extend upward from the door frame. A regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of 3 is provided.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting mallet 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a hitting mallet 683 extending diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 530 of the lower rail cover unit 520, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side. It is provided with a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 67A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 67B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 70A is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 70A. Further, FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. Is. FIG. 72 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

Further, FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 75A is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75B is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 78B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) that hangs swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the ball guide unit 820 below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank ball receiving port 530 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 with the door is provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear race 822 through the partition plate 823. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827, which is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotation positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826, is provided.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the 821b, the ball guide inlet 821a, and the ball guide outlet 821b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d that extends diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821d in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending obliquely from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822d in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825c, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. The guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (to the right in the front view), the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the movable piece 826a, and the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (to the right in the front view), the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Consistent with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825, 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by its own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of 826 after one member is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member front 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 820f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. .. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight As a result, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c are formed. Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 in the rear of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the 826 after the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c is provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c project inward. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of one member and the rear 826 of a movable piece can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. It is possible to replenish the game ball, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be distributed. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c to allow game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped with the front side open, with a payout entrance 832a open in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout entrance 832a on the bottom surface where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

Further, the payout device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 which is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side surface of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically to, and after bending so as to extend almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and an upper part on the right side surface in front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and an upper part on the right side surface in front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality of (three) front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. (3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a tubular shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0, which is the outer diameter of the game ball. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 821 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and has a main body portion 843a in which the lower portion is bent to form a front view shape and a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843c. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball pulling movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball-extracting movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state. Although a force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the normal state is maintained because the rotation to the counterclockwise direction is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball pulling outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 381e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as a weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and is formed between the upper ball outlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls are distributed, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g for guiding the game ball entering from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward and an upper portion opening downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side in front view. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b It is located directly below the ball ejection port 831c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. The 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 each have an opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game ball discharged downward from the payout port 831b, which is paid out by the payout device 830, enters the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 202.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And the full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3 and the usual. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball removal taxiway 865 that discharges to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. As shown in the figure, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached to the lower side of the taxiway 861 and at the position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a and can close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in the front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is urged from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 526, the full tank socket 530, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. The game ball will not spill from the road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 78 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full tank are filled. The through ball passage 526 and the full tank ball receiving port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank ball receiving port 528 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 201, more game balls are released from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533. Then, when the movable piece 534 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 533 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops paying out the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In this state, the number of storage passages 533 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 to control the interface inside. A payout control board that is mounted across the interface control board box 940 that houses the board and the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls. It has a box 950 and.

The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls are distributed (Fig.). 87).

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to 2300 on the side unit and approximately in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game ball, which is attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010 and has been received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. A panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 85).

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, among the change displays of the second special symbol related to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 142. reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided, and the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are provided so that the game balls can be accepted at either of them.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 87, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to 2300 on the side unit and approximately in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88A is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The first prize opening door is a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate with the lower side rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is used to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of the 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts due to unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first large prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from the rear and closes the first prize opening 2005. The first prize-winning door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state with the first prize-winning door 2005 closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening door 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[5-8b. Under the side unit]
Next, the side unit lower 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89A is a perspective view of the front unit below the side unit and above the side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89B is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and above the side unit as viewed from behind. The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

The side unit lower 2200 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and the unit base 2201 projecting forward from the front surface and upward and upward. The rear is open, and the three ball receiving portions 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 are communicated with each other and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. It is provided with a gutter portion 2203 that guides the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 to the rear.

The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left side of the front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 are separated from each other to the left and right and project from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

The side unit lower 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in the front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The side unit lower 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1112 by the gutter portion 2203, respectively. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel plate 1112 is mounted in the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 125). Is detected by and discharged downward.

[5-8c. On the side unit]
Next, the 2300 on the side unit of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in the game area 5a from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200.

The side unit upper 2300 has a flat plate-shaped unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a shelf portion 2302 extending forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extending to the left and right so that the right end side in the front view is lowered. And have. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf portion 2302. It can be guided to the direction (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow path on the right side of the center accessory. Further, FIG. 93 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 93 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the production unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006.

The center accessory 2500 includes a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the peripheral edge of the opening 1112 that largely penetrates the center of the panel plate 1112 and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like frame having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. It has a center base 2510. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position on the upper side slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so as to be able to enter on the outer peripheral surface at the substantially central center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view in the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510. The warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side of the front view in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 2521 can be released and heads backward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) and the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510 and behind the flange portion 2511. The guide path 2523 to be guided and the game ball guided by the guide path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in the front view, and extend to the left and right along the lower side within the frame at the center of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a stage 2530, which rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2530 is curved so that both the left and right ends of the front view are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction are the lowest, and the stage 2530 swells so as to be slightly higher between the lowest portions. It is out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape with a gentle inclination. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a portion that is slightly higher than the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a fan-shaped central guide portion 2531 that lowers forward and slightly expands to the left and right, and a central guide portion 2531. It is provided with a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532, which is formed in each of the two lowest parts on both the left and right sides of the above, and which is lowered toward the front and spreads to the left and right.

In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp inlet 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the taxiway 2523 It is discharged forward from either the central guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532 of the stage 2530, and is returned (refluxed) into the game area 5a again. Further, in the stage 2530, when the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located directly under the central guidance portion 2531, and when the game ball is discharged from the central guidance portion 2531 into the game area 5a. , It is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

As shown in FIG. 92, the center accessory 2500 has a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extending substantially vertically downward from the right end of the front view on the upper side of the center base 2510 to near the center in the vertical direction. The front peripheral wall so that the right end side is slightly lowered from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the vicinity of the inner circumference of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000) in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. A part of the upper right side wall part 2512b extending to the right and a part of the front peripheral wall part 2512 extending downward from the right end of the upper right side wall part to almost the same height as the stage 2530. It includes a 2512c and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends to the left so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and has an upper right distribution space 2541 in which game balls can be distributed and an upper right. On the right side of the front view of the right hanging wall portion 2512c that communicates with the distribution space 2541, a right flow passage 2542 that allows the game ball to flow downward, and a game ball that communicates with the right flow passage 2542 and is formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d. It is provided with a lower right distribution space 2543 that can be distributed and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right distribution space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543 form a right-handed game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size whose vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can flow down by a free path. The right-hand flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end extending vertically downward extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the width in the left-right direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is possible to let the game balls flow down in a row up and down.

The lower right distribution space 2543 extends to the left from directly below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end side in the front view becomes lower, and then opens to the left with the second attacker passage 2543a. (Ii) A discharge passage 2543b that communicates with the right end of the attacker passage 2543a and extends downward, and a second that penetrates the flange portion 2511 and opens rearward at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b so that the game ball can pass through. It is equipped with a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has the left and right dimensions outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. In the lower right distribution space 2543, when assembled on the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543a is on the left side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, and the first start port 2002 and the first large It opens to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c that opens at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and is returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being damaged.

The upper right circulation space 2541 has an open front as a whole, and a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at a portion substantially lower half in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent right front decorative plate 2544 whose front extends from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right in the front view, and the rear is the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right distribution space 2543 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 whose front extends downward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d, and the rear is the lower right horizontal wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 that project inside the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and extend in a direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball. In the right-hand flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 project alternately from the surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the distribution direction of the game ball at predetermined intervals. The plurality of reduction ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 have a distance between the reduction ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side, which is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right-hand flow passage 2542, the game ball always flows down in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to the acceleration due to gravity.

On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of reduction ribs 2546 alternately project from the surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other at predetermined intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball. .. The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right distribution space 2543 are set so that the distance between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. There is. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, even within the lower right distribution space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the distribution speed of the game balls is attenuated to prevent the distribution speed of the game balls from becoming too high.

In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the right in the front view, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can only pass in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate portion 2003 is arranged slightly to the left of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that closes the lower half behind the upper right distribution space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. Be prepared for. More specifically, the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear open at the upper end, and is directly below the general winning opening 2001. On the left side surface of the front view, the ball receiving member 2548 is formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens to the left, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 extend around the axis whose lower end extends back and forth. The second start port door member 2549, which is rotatably attached and closes the second start port 2004 so as to be openable and closable, and the second start port door member 2549, which is attached to the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 and is opened and closed, are driven to open and close. It includes a start port solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142) and a second start port sensor 2551 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004.

The general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500 is opened with a size capable of accepting only one game ball upward from the right side of the front view with respect to directly below the gate portion 2003. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in the front view.

The second starting port 2004 opens to the left in the front view directly under the general winning opening 2001, and the second starting port door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise in the front view to open to the left. It becomes possible to accept the game ball. The second starting port door member 2549 has two sides extending so that the outer shape of the front view extends from a base circle constituting the lower portion and a point outside the base circle so as to be in contact with the base circle. It is formed in a so-called "drop-like shape" as if it is composed of and, and is rotatably attached at the center of the base end circle.

In the second starting port 2004, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2550 is de-energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the tip side is located substantially directly above the base end circle. , The second start door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball cannot be accepted. Then, when the start port solenoid 2550 is energized according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the tip side of the second start port door member 2549 moves to the left in the front view. In addition, the second start door member 2549 rotates and stops rotating with the tip side slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted. In the state where the second start door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second start door member 2549 is in a state of substantially coincident with the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, and then detected by the second starting port sensor 2551 and discharged downward.

The second prize opening 2006 is arranged so as to open upward at the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543. More specifically, the second upper prize opening 2006a constituting the second prize opening 2006 opens upward at the right end of the front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and is also the second grand prize opening. The second lower prize opening 2006b constituting the 2006 opens upward in the second attacker passage 2543a on the left side and the lower side of the second upper prize opening 2006a in the front view. The widths of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are formed within a range of three to four times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The center accessory 2500 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the center base 2510 so as to be able to open and close the second upper winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. It is attached to the flat plate-shaped second upper prize opening door member 2552, which protrudes forward and closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second upper prize opening door member 2552 is opened and closed, and the second upper prize opening solenoid 2553 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second upper prize opening 2006a (FIG. 142). The center base 2510 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction so that the second lower winning opening 2006b, which opens upward, can be opened and closed, and the front end is from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. Also protrudes forward and closes the second lower prize opening 2006b, and is attached to the flat plate-shaped second lower prize opening door member 2555 that is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second lower attacker solenoid 2556 that opens and closes and drives the second lower prize opening door member 2555, and the second lower prize opening sensor 2557 that detects the game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b (FIG. 142. See) and.

Further, the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the space between the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped crossing plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side of the view is lowered and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and a second lower large plate that extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped discharge plate portion 2559 that extends in the left-right direction from the left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so that the left end side is lowered and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And have. The length of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction is formed within a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The left and right lengths of the discharge plate portion 2559 are formed within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is installed. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, from the upstream side of the flow of the game ball, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546 of the fifth deceleration rib 2546e, the sixth deceleration rib 2546f, the seventh deceleration rib 2546g, the eighth deceleration rib 2546h, the ninth deceleration rib 2546i, and the tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided. The odd-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the even-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is arranged on the left side of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and near the right end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is arranged substantially in the center of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is arranged on the right side of the right end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b and near the left end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the front view of the second lower winning opening 2006. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is arranged on the right side of the front view at the center in the left-right direction of the second lower winning opening 2006b. The 7th deceleration rib 2546g is arranged on the left side of the front view at the center of the second lower winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged to the right of the left end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end of the front view of the second lower winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is arranged substantially in the center of the discharge plate portion 2559 in the left-right direction.

Of the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration ribs 2546j, the front surface of the flange portion 2511 is provided with odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the ninth deceleration ribs 2546i. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 is provided with an even number of deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j. The even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 93A).

Of the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b and the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 93A, the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555). It is separated from the lower end of the other deceleration ribs 2546 by a large distance from the upper surface of the other reduction ribs. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are each the same distance as the substantially outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b in the front view. , Are formed so as to be separated.

As a result, when the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b shifts from the open state where the game ball can be accepted to the closed state where the game ball cannot be accepted, the second upper prize opening slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower prize opening door member 2555, the front left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a or the front left end of the second lower winning opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

In the state where the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 protrude forward and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are closed, the first A state in which the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game ball that is narrower than the above and circulates (rolls) on the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 is the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. It always comes into contact with the door, and a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 includes a portion of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right side of the front view, and an inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000). ), A space with a width in which only one game ball can be distributed is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right of the front view from the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the center in the game area 5a. A game ball can be distributed in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the front view of the accessory 2500.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball driven into the game area 5a abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails and circulates downward through various paths.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as viewed from the back.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game ball, which is attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010 and has been received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom of the back box 3010, and then is centered in the left-right direction along the bottom. After guiding to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in the front view along the bottom inside the back box 3010. It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and is behind the effect drive board 3043 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The upper relay board 3040 that relays the connection with the upper left decorative board 3253, the upper relay board cover 3041 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending to the left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 housed in the effect drive board box 3042 from the peripheral control board 1510. The effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, etc. based on the control command, and the main control board 1310, which is attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear surface of the back box 3010, each winning opening sensor, each solenoid, etc. The panel relay board 3044 relaying the connection of the above is provided, and the panel relay board cover 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a with an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The two fixing grooves 3010c, which are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the main liquid crystal display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decorative unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side in the front view, upward from the center in the vertical direction, near the front end. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is formed with a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration attached to the front of the unit base 3051 to imitate a mahjong "middle tile" in three dimensions. The translucent back left middle decorative body 3052, the back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It has.

The back left middle decorative unit 3050 can illuminate the back left middle decorative body 3052 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left middle decorative substrate 3053.

[5-9c. Movable production unit after the back]
Next, the rear-rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 100 (b) disassembles the back-rear movable effect unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the back bottom rear movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back bottom rear first decorative body and the back bottom rear second decorative body, and FIG. 102 shows the rotation drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back together with the 1st decorative body under the back bottom and the 2nd decorative body after the back bottom. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the rear-back movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a rotation of the lower back rear first decorative body and the lower back rear second decorative body together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the back lower rear second decorative body is facing the front, and (c) is the state of (b) the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body. Is a front view of a state in which is moved to the moving end on the left side of the front view. Further, FIG. 105 (d) shows the first decorative surface of the back lower rear first decorative body by rotating the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body together in the state of FIG. 104 (c). It is a front view of the state facing the front, and (e) is a front view, in which the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated from the state of (d) to open the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the back bottom are facing the front.

The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is supported by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back so as to be hinge-rotatably supported on one side extending vertically with respect to the axis extending vertically. The rear second decorative body 3120, the rotary drive unit 3130 in which the rear lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body are hingeably rotatable and each can be rotationally driven separately, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The slide unit 3150 is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back bottom rear fixed decorative body 3160 is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

The first decorative surface 3110 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112, which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations formed and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 and the first decorative body 3113 are mounted inside the display screen. The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the decorative surface 3111 and the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 of the four sides extending vertically in the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 are outward. The first decorative body is formed between the two first hinge portions 3115, which are projected so as to be able to be supported so as to rotate around the axis extending vertically, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. It is equipped with a first decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted inside the main body 3113 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back is formed with a decoration with the left half of the characters "holy". The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and are mounted coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are hinge-rotatably supported by the second hinge portion 3124 of the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back. The first decorative substrate after the back bottom can illuminate the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The second decorative surface 3120 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122, which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations formed and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 and the rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 extend vertically. It protrudes outward from the side of the side that is in contact with the second decorative surface 3122, and the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 are rotated about the axis extending vertically. A decorative body that is cylindrically protruding downward from the lower end of the three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are separated from each other vertically and the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124. The support shaft 3125, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the above, and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are mounted in the second decorative body 3123 and have a plurality of LEDs on both sides. It is equipped with a second decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted on the lower back.

The first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the characters "Tenun" are written vertically. The second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration on which the right half of the word "holy" is applied. The second decorative body 3123 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed to be approximately the same size as the first decorative body 3113 of the lower back first decorative body 3110. That is, the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom have external dimensions. They are formed to be approximately the same size.

The three second hinge portions 3124 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 are vertically separated from each other and are coaxially attached to each other, and the lower rear first decorative body is placed between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portion 3115 of the 3110 is located and attached to each other so that the hinges can rotate. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 can be rotated (hinge rotation) from the open state where they are substantially on the same surface. When the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are left and right with the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 sandwiched between them. The decorations are integrated and the word "holy" appears. Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the first decorative surfaces 3111 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, respectively, The decorations corresponding to the decorations made on the 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first The one hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are made inconspicuous.

In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 for hinge-rotating the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom independently of the second decorative body 3120 is rotatable at the upper end portion. Will be inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surface 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122. More specifically, it is formed to have a length of 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the heavy lower back first decorative body 3110 or the like is eccentric on one side extending vertically by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the hinge can be rotated, the lower back first decorative body is first. The decorative body 3110 and the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

As shown in FIG. 102, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding from the gear teeth at one place on the outer circumference, and cannot be rotated once. The back bottom rear second decorative substrate of the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 can illuminate the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-rear movable production unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a box shape with the front side open and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. The cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a, which is rotatably supported by the 3131 and the rotary drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and under the back. One of the connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over half a circumference around the lower end portion of the sleeve portion 3132a, and the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c. It includes a rotation transmission member 3132 having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the end.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body side actuating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a rear lower rear first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. The 3134, the first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first drive motor 3134 is mounted after the back bottom and the first drive motor 3134 mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a lower rear second drive motor 3137 for rotationally driving the second drive gear 3136, and a lower rear second drive motor 3137 are mounted and inside the rotary drive unit base 3131. It includes a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132. The first rotation detection sensor 3139 and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. It is equipped with a second rotation detection sensor 3140, which is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, a back bottom rear first decorative board, a back bottom rear second decorative board, and a back bottom rear first drive motor 3134. The rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection between the back bottom rear second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140 and the back bottom rear relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. , Further prepared.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat plate-shaped unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 and extends long to the left and right, and a rack gear. A rack member 3143 having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view of the 3143a is provided.

The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape and has a main portion 3131a in which a decorative body support shaft 3125, a rear lower rear first drive motor 3134, a lower rear second drive motor 3137, and the like are housed. A sub-part 3131b, which is substantially cubic in height at about half the height of the main part 3131a and is arranged on the left side of the main part 3131a when viewed from the front and accommodates the rotation drive unit relay board 3141, is provided. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d whose front end side is open and cut out toward the rear on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. .. The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates vertically, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed from the upper side to the lower side and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second decorative body 3120 is inserted after the lower back. The open front end side of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d is closed by the unit cover 3142.

The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

The first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back is a connecting portion 3132b that rotates together with the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 that meshes with the first drive gear 3133 by rotationally driving the first drive gear 3133. The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back bottom. On the other hand, the second drive motor 3137 after lowering the back is driven by the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshing with the second drive gear 3136. The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is mounted on the box-shaped unit base 3151 which is mounted in the back box 3010 and whose front and upper sides are open, and the upper part in the unit base 3151. The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is attached to the front surface, and the slide guide 3152 extending to the left and right is rotatably attached around the axis extending forward and backward approximately in the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction. A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a that meshes with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and has a diameter larger than that of the pinion gear 3153a. The 3153, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that meshes with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, and a rear lower rear third drive motor 3155 that is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151 by rotating the drive gear 3154. The slide detection sensor 3156, which is installed in the unit base 3151 and detects the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and the unit base by closing substantially the lower half of the front open portion of the unit base 3151. A horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end of the 3151, and a rear lower rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 to relay the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. It has.

The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotation drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom rotates the drive gear 3154 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid and moved in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 that meshes with.

Subsequently, the operation of the rear-back movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104 (a), the rotation drive unit 3130 is located at the right end of the front view with respect to the left and right slide directions by the slide unit 3150 in the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100. ing. Further, in a normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back are in a closed state with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, and after lowering the back. The first decorative surface 3111 (display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In this normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are located on the right side of the front view with respect to the axis of hinge rotation extending up and down (decorative body support shaft 3125). doing. Further, in a normal state, the side side of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, which is rotatably supported by the hinge, is the side surface opposite to the side of the decorative body support shaft 3125. The whole is rotated so as to be located in front of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 in the second decoration 3120 after the back bottom is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, the first decorative body 3110 after the back is facing the front (front) of the movable decorative unit 3100 after the back in the assembled state on the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, at the lower part of the right corner of the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is on the player side. The display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized from the above. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 is located in front of the center of the hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device. The display screen of 3114 is inclined so as to face the surface of the game panel 1100 toward the vertical line side passing through the center of the game area 5a.

In this normal state, the second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom of the rotary drive unit 3130 passes through the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126, and the decoration support shaft 3125, and the second back bottom rear second. When the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, and the second decorative surface 3120 is rotated clockwise (160 degrees) in a plan view, it is closed and the lower back is closed. The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 located in front of the rear second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the rear lower rear second decorative body 3120 and rotates together, and is decorated with "heavenly luck". The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 104 (b)). Further, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the lower back first decorative body 3110, which was facing the front in the normal state, is in a state of facing the rear and cannot be seen from the player side. From this state, neither the lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be further rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back is in a state of being detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and after lowering the back. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120 is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in the front view clockwise direction by the third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position at the left end of the front view together with the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 via 3143a. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, when the rotation drive unit 3130 is slid and moved to the position of the left end in the front view, the axis line extending up and down of the hinge rotation (center line of the decorative body support shaft 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which the state shown in FIG. 104 (b) is slid and moved to the position at the left end of the front view. Further, FIG. 105 (d) shows the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member by moving the position to the left end position in the front view in the state of FIG. 104 (a) and driving the first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back. The first decorative body after the back is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of the 3132. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the 3110 is facing directly in front of the user, or the first decorative surface 3110 is driven by the first drive motor 3134 after the back bottom from the state shown in FIG. 104 (c). By rotating 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is rotated together with the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back, and the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is rotated. The state in which one decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed directly in front is shown.

Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the second lower back rear decorative body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by driving the second lower back rear drive motor 3137, or FIG. 105 In the state of (d), when the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back is rotated 180 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view by driving the first driving motor 3134 after lowering the back, as shown in FIG. 105 (e). , The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are folded facing each other, and then the hinge is rotated to rotate the back bottom. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 are opened after the lower back, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and face the front.

In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the first decorative body after lower back 3110 are compared with the case where the first decorative body 3110 after lower back and the second decorative body 310 after lower back are overlapped with each other and closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 side by side, the decorative surface formed by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be formed. The size is doubled, and it can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to strongly attract the player's attention, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player. Further, in the state of FIG. 105 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are integrated, and the characters "holy" are written. The decoration becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 have the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. The decoration corresponding to the decorated decoration is given, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are opened. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character "holy" can be visually recognized by the player in good condition.

As shown in the figure, the one-piece decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 includes "holy" on top of "holy". A cutout decoration 3170 such as "1" is formed. This cutout decoration 3170 is a decoration made by cutting out a part of one character or a pattern, and on the upper side of the cutout decoration 3170, the back top left first decorative body 3210 of the back top left movable production unit 3200 described later. When the cut-out decoration 3260, in which the decoration of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the decoration of the second decorative member 3222 of the second decorative body 3220 on the back side are lined up side by side, the entire character of "sparrow" is completed. Yes (see Figure 134).

As described above, according to the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are closed by superimposing their surfaces on each other. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are opened side by side, the decorative surface of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is enlarged (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which were closed and could not be seen from the player side, are opened so that they can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 105 (d)), when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is rotated and arranged on the left side of the front view of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, the first decorative body after the back bottom is initially displayed. The decorative area, which was only the first decorative surface 3111 of the 3110, becomes two, the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 so as to extend to the left. The area of decoration is doubled, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen so far, can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Alternatively, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are closed, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom faces forward (FIG. 104 (c)). (Refer to), when the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is rotated and arranged on the right side of the front view of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom, initially only the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is used. The decorative area is doubled as the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 so that the existing decorative area extends to the right. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen so far, can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). In this way, by opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decorative range by the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. Since it is possible to expand and change the decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest is focused on the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back. Being able to attract strongly and entertain the decoration spread by the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, and at the same time make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a state in which the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are put together. When rotated to, the hinges of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back rotate around the side extending vertically on one side that is rotatably attached. When the surface (back surface) facing backward in this state is rotated so as to face forward, the entire positions of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back move the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the opposite position by sandwiching it. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)), when the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back first decorative body is formed. The entire 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 move to the left in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing forward (FIGS. 104 (b) and FIG. (C). On the other hand, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are closed, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom faces forward (FIG. 104 (b)). And (c)), when the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 The whole moves to the right in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is in a state of facing forward (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)). As a result, the area of decoration by the lower back first decorative body 3110 or the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side can be changed. Because of this, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back and lower. It is possible to entertain the movements and decorations of the 3120 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a state in which the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 or the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is placed. When the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are rotated together to open by rotating, in any case, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom are the first. (Ii) Since the surface of the decorative body 3120 that can be seen from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom open. It is difficult to understand whether they rotate together, and it is possible to make the player excited and excited by which action the player performs, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. Further, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, the player can see that the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened and rotated together. Since the change in the decoration that can be seen from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and the player can not get bored by various effects.

As described above, the lower back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is first decorated differently by rotating the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 by hinges. The decorative surfaces 3111, 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be turned to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back to the left and right. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

Further, in the lower back movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (the position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending vertically in the outer shape of the square in the second lower back decorative body 3120. The upper end and the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported, and it is rotatably supported at two locations that are as far apart as possible. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if an eccentric load that attempts to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 acts due to the weight of the attached back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt. The decorative body support shaft 3125 can be supported in a straight line, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 can be rotated. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decorative body Since the support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt, the heavy back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and back lower rear second decorative body 3120, which are rotatably attached to each other, can be placed coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[5-9d. Back top left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109 (b) shows the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view showing the state moved to the position of the right end of the front view, and (c) shows the state where the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body are expanded from the state of (b). It is a front view.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end in the front view to the vicinity of the center. The back-up left movable production unit 3200 extends up and down the front-view of the back-top left first decorative body 3210 and the back-top left first decorative body 3210, which have a square front-view shape and have a predetermined decoration on the front surface. Mounted above the back top left second decoration 3220 and the back top left first decoration 3210, which are hinged rotatably mounted on the right side and have different decorations on the two facing sides The rotary drive unit 3230 that hinges and drives the back upper left second decorative body 3220, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid to the left and right together with the rotary drive unit 3230. It is provided with a slide unit 3240 that can be mounted inside the back box 3010.

The back top left first decorative body 3210 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 has a flat plate-shaped fixed decorative member 3211 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency, and a front end of the fixed decorative member 3211 on the right side of the front view. It covers the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212, which protrudes outward from the side and is coaxially attached to the axis extending vertically and vertically. The first decorative body base 3213, which is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. From the left end of the first decorative base 3213, which is connected to the upper surface of the first decorative base 3213 and the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and has an L-shaped side view. The connecting portion 3215 extending to a position to the right of the right end, the rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending to the left and right, and the connecting portion 3215 extending forward from the vicinity of the left end in the front view. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3217.
Is equipped with.

The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly vertically long quadrangle in a front view. The length of the side extending to the left and right of the fixed decorative member 3211 is the side extending to the left and right of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the lower back first decorative body 3110, and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120. It has the same length, and the length of the side extending vertically is shorter than the length of the side extending vertically of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration on which the left half of the character "sparrow" is applied. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the present embodiment, the character "sparrow" is cut off from the upper side to the lower side of the lowermost "one" part.

The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions upward from the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 project to the right and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in the front view. The rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the front surface of the portion of the first decorative body base 3213 that protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. A slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connecting portion 3215 on the rear surface of a vertically extending portion in an L-shape in a side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

The back-up left first decorative body 3210 can illuminate and decorate the fixed decorative member 3211 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back-up left first decorative substrate 3214.

The back top left movable effect unit 3200 has a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a square outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222, which is attached to the first decorative member 3221 and has a translucent decoration on the surface facing back to the surface of the first decorative member 3221, and the left and right sides of the first decorative member 3221. Two second hinges 3223 and two hinges rotatably attached to the first hinge 3212 of the upper left first decorative body 3210, which protrude outward from one of the vertically extending sides. A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member. It is provided with a back-up left second decorative substrate (not shown), which is attached between the 3221 and the second decorative member 3222 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative member 3221 of the second decorative body 3220 on the back upper left is formed with a decoration having the characters "Dokun" on its surface. The second decorative member 3222 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character "sparrow" is applied to the surface and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" by being located on the left side of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the first decorative body 3210 on the back upper left when viewed from the front. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cutout decoration 3260 in which the lowermost part "one" is cut off from the upper side with respect to the character "sparrow". On the lower side, the decorations (cutout decorations) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character "sparrow" is completed. Since the cutout decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable production unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", it can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut out.

The two second hinge portions 3223 project to the right and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are provided at positions closer to the center from both upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The actuating gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operating gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

The back top left second decorative body 3220 can lightly decorate the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by appropriately emitting an LED mounted on the back top left first decorative substrate (not shown). ..

The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 creates a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration base 3213 of the back top left first decoration 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotary drive cover 3232 formed and mounted on the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231, and a working gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 which is rotatably mounted between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear that meshes with the transmission gear 3233 (not shown), and a back-up left first drive motor that rotates and drives the drive gear and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232. It includes a 3235, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) attached between the rotation drive base 3231 and the rotation drive cover 3232 and detecting the rotation position of the drive gear.

The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extending outward, and by detecting this detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, the rotation position of the drive gear is detected, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, And the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operating gear 3225.

The rotary drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operating gear 3225. Can be done.

The slide unit 3240 of the back-up left movable production unit 3200 is slidably attached to the horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, the horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241, and the slide rail 3242. A base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so as to form a space between the slider 3243 to which the connection portion 3215 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 is attached to the front surface and the unit base 3241. The back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the back upper left second drive mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the base cover 3244 and projects between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3245, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a that meshes with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b that rotates integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. The transmission gear member 3247 rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244 has meshed with the second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210. Detects the pinion gear 3248 that meshes with the rack gear 3216 and is rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and the detection piece 3217 that is attached to the base cover 3244 and is attached to the back upper left first decorative body 3210. It is equipped with a slide detection sensor 3249.

Further, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the left side of the front view on the front surface of the base cover 3244, and includes a back upper left first decorative substrate 3214, a back upper left second decorative substrate, a back upper left first drive motor 3235, and a rotation detection sensor. The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the back upper left relay board 3250 covering the front surface of the base cover 3244. A board cover 3251 attached to the front surface, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front surface of the board cover 3251, and a back upper left decorative board 3253 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A translucent back upper left decorative body 3254 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253 and having a predetermined decoration formed therein.

When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back top left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 backs up the back top left first decorative body 3210 via the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid left and right together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the back upper left decorative body 3254 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is back-up so that the back-up left first decorative body 3210 covers the front surface of the back-up left first decorative body 3210 as shown in FIG. 109 (a). The left second decorative body 3220 is in a state of being folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 side by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state of being. Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in the front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the player side. It is invisible from the above (see FIG. 81 and the like).

In a normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right in the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with the 3248, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 109 (b)). In this state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the hinge-rotatable vertically extending axes of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are centered in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133).

Then, in a state where the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230 passes through the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is unfolded. The hinge is rotated to the right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 in the front view (see FIG. 109 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are lined up side by side, which makes them about twice as large as the normal state, so that they stand out in the game area 5a. It can attract the player's attention strongly, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side and face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. Then, the decoration of the character "sparrow" becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are decorated with the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decoration is applied, and when the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is opened from the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to make the character "sparrow" visible to the player in good condition.

In addition, the decoration of the character "sparrow" that can be visually recognized as a unit is cut off from the position above the "one" part on the bottom side, and the back top left first decoration body 3210 and the back top. To be integrated with the decoration of the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Then, the character "sparrow" is in perfect condition (see Fig. 134).

In this way, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back-up left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the vertical axis, it can be folded so as to cover the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210, or it can be unfolded so as to line up on the front right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

[5-9e. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 111A is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111B is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported by a back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and a back right fixed decorative body 3310 slidably supported in the left-right direction behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310. The frame-shaped movable back right decorative body 3320 and the movable back right decorative body 3320 are slid to the left and right to be mounted in the back box 3010, and the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front surface. It is equipped with a back left drive unit 3330.

The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 has a vertically long substantially quadrangular shape in front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311 which is three-dimensionally decorated and has translucency, and the fixed side decorative member 3311, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the figure, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a “發” tile decoration. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 can illuminate the fixed side decorative member 3311 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312.

The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long quadrangle having a front view shape substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 having transparency attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321. And the frame-shaped movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decorative frame 3322, and the back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decorative frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324 and the like are provided.

The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes downward from the movable side decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and the protruding portion is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the back left drive unit 3330. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U shape along the portion on the right side of the center in the front left-right direction of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322. By emitting the LED of the back left movable decorative substrate 3324, the movable side decorative member 3321 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable production unit 3300 is mounted on the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 installed in the back box 3010 and the lower front of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The slide guide 3332 that extends in the left-right direction is attached, the back left drive motor 3333 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333. A rod-shaped operating arm (not shown) that is attached and the tip side is connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 that detects the rotational position of the operating arm and is attached to the unit base 3331. And the back left which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 and relays the connection between the back left fixed decorative board 3312, the back left movable decorative board 3324, the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and the effect drive board 3043. It includes a relay board 3336.

The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 has the back left fixed decorative body 3310 attached to the front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in the front view. The slide guide 3332 is attached to the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 when viewed from the rear. The operating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end of the lower side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 having a frame-shaped tip end side. Further, although not shown, the operating arm has a slit formed at the tip thereof, which penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction thereof. A guide pin projecting rearward from the vicinity of the lower right corner of the rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted into the slit.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the back left movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 111A, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310, and is almost invisible from the front. It is in a state of being. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located in an invisible immersive position. In this normal state, an operating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. Further, in the normal state, a part of the right end of the front view of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the back left. The portion on the left side of the front view of the front of the fixed decorative body can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable decorative body 3120. ing.

In this normal state, when the operating arm is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the operating arm is inserted. , The operating arm presses to the right in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 is located to the right from the front view rear side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the sliding movement to the right stops. As a result, the part on the right side of the left side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 111 (b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the appearance position visible from the player side.

In the state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. In addition to being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged rearward through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect movie) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decoration body 3320, the player can see the frame of the back left movable decoration body 3320. It is possible to give the illusion that a liquid crystal display device is installed inside. As a result, the player can be illusioned that there are two sub-liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 in the first decorative body 3110 after the back of the movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9f. Movable production unit on the back]
Next, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 123. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 113 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 (b) shows the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 117 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decorative unit from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in a normal state, and FIG. 118 (b) shows a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorations of the back-up middle decoration unit are half-opened outward. (C) is a front view showing a pair of back-up middle decoration units of the back-up middle decoration unit in a state of being completely opened to the outside.

Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a rear view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit. It is a perspective view. FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 (b) shows the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 121 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back-up middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decorative body unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. ..

The back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from substantially the center to the right end in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are operably attached. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the back upper middle decorative body 3412, the rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410, and the rotary connecting member 3430 The back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down and rotateably, and the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back upper right decoration is mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. It includes a unit 3480 and a back-up middle relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back-up middle drive unit 3440.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the back-up middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3412, which are arranged behind the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and have a predetermined decoration on the front surface. A pair of translucent flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the pair of slide bases 3413 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415 mounted on the rear surface of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back-up middle second decorative board 3415 The substrate cover covers the rear surface of the 3415 and forms a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative body 3412 on the back surface and the substrate cover 3416. A flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached to the rear side of the 3416 and a decorative unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417 are provided.

Further, the back-up middle decorative unit 3410 is attached to the rear surface of the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative unit base 3418 and the rotating shaft protruding from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A spur gear-shaped first drive gear attached to the rotating shafts of the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and arranged between the motor base 3419 and the decorative unit base 3418. The 3421 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 which is rotatably attached to the decorative unit base 3418 so as to mesh with the first drive gear 3421 and project the front end forward from the decorative unit base. The first pinion gear 3423, which meshes with the first transmission gear 3422 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative unit base 3418, is provided.

Further, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is engaged with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches one of the pair of slide bases 3413. The first slider 3424 which has 3424b and is slidably attached between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. On the opposite side, it has a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches the rest (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , The second slider 3425 which is slidably attached to the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction, and the slide position of the second slider 3425 which is attached to the decorative unit base 3418 from the rear side. It is provided with a slide detection sensor 3426 for detecting the above.

In each of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, the shape of each front view is such that one end of a quadrangle extending to the left and right in the longitudinal direction bulges outward in a semi-circular shape. The end side on the opposite side is recessed inward in a semicircular arc, and the recessed portion in this semicircular arc is a recess 3411a. Further, in the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the outer periphery excluding the end side in which the recess 3411a recessed inward in a semicircular shape is formed extends rearward in a plate shape. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are attached so that the ends on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. Further, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and the front surface of one back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is on the head side of the "dragon". The decoration is formed on the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back of the rest (the other) so that the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" has a metallic luster.

The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a flat plate shape extending to the left and right, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been done. The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a circular central decorative portion 3412a that bulges forward in a circular shape that can be inserted into the recess 3411a of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 in the center, and the left and right of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both sides vertically separated from each other, and a circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both the left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b and having the same size as the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b. An intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d having a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, which are formed on both the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c near the left and right ends, are provided. The second decorative body 3412 on the back surface is formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and has a central decorative portion 3412a, a central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, an intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and an outer circumference of the edge decorative portion 3412d on the front surface. A linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed on the surface. The second decorative body 3412 on the back is decorated to remind the player of the "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface, and are rearward around the outer periphery extending to the rear of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface. It is attached to the end. As a result, by assembling the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is placed between the portion forming the front surface of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413. A space is formed in which the second decorative body 3412, the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back surface, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted. Further, each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is provided with slits 3413a that penetrate the front and rear and extend to the left and right. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, one slide base 3413 has a slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the upper side, and the remaining slide base 3413 has a slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the lower side. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The pair of back-up middle first decorative substrates 3414 and back-up middle second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates having a white surface (entire surface). This makes it easier to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the first decorative body 3414 on the back side is attached to the slide base 3413 away from the portion forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back side, the light from the LED is on the back side. Since the irradiation range of light is widened by the time it reaches the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, it is possible to uniformly illuminate and decorate the entire first decorative body 3411 in the back and middle even if the number of LEDs is small. it can. On the other hand, the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 can illuminate the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412, and also has a central decorative portion 3412a and a central horizontal decorative portion of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412. The 3412b, the intermediate decoration portion 3412c, and the edge decoration portion 3412d can be independently luminescently decorated.

The substrate cover 3416 includes a mounting boss 3416a that projects rearward from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the rear surface in a columnar shape and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 that penetrates the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 slides relatively in the left-right direction in the slit 3413a via the bush 3427 that is rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends left and right, and the first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted and the first slit 3417a penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. It is provided with a second slit 3417b through which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

The first pinion gear 3423 is arranged slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged side by side from the left end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have a front end that penetrates the first slit 3417a of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the head side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have a front end that penetrates the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. Further, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that projects upward in a flat plate shape from the upper part near the right end in the front view. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is closed with the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 on the recess 3411a side in contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the like. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through the circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are from the front. I can't see it.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117A, the left end of the front view of the first slider 3424 and the right end of the front view of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. Further, the detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decorative portion 3412a is light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back side, the player can be shown the decoration reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". Further, in a normal state, when the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is light-emittingly decorated by the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415, the back-up middle first decoration covering the front of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is covered. The body 3411 can be luminescently decorated as a whole. Further, when the LED of the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is made to emit light under a normal state, the light is formed on the rear surface of the second decorative body 3415 on the back surface, and the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is formed in white. It can be reflected and diffused on the front surface, etc., and the outer periphery of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven in the front-view clockwise direction by the first drive motor 3420 on the back side from the normal state via the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422, the first The rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 that mesh with the pinion gear 3423 slide the first slider 3424 to the left in the front view and the second slider 3425 to the right in the front view. Slide to move. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 on the back side, which is decorated on the head side of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424, slides to the left in the front view and is the second. The first decorative body 3411 on the back side with the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" mounted via the mounting boss 3425b of the two sliders 3425 slides to the right in the front view, and a pair of back top middle The first decorative body 3411 slides open in a direction away from each other.

When the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid away from each other, the back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are moved from between the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 on the recess 3411a side. A part of the second decorative body 3412 on the back side, which is arranged behind the 3411, faces forward. Then, in a state where the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 Temporarily stop the rotational drive of. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 to the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and four. The central horizontal decoration portion 3412b is in a state of facing forward. In this state, if the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back surface, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong". it can.

From this state, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved in the directions away from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. As shown in c), substantially the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 (fully open state). In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward, and the back upper middle second decorative substrate When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d are luminescently decorated by the 3415, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "mahjong" "man-point stick". it can. Further, in this state, the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 make the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3411 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3412 luminescent as a whole. be able to.

Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418 in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, and the back-up middle drive unit 3440 It includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 in the medium rotation unit 3460, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connecting bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotating unit 3460.

Next, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 and the like, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 on the front side to mount the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 so as to be rotatable. The unit base 3441 attached to the back box 3010, the base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and the base cover. The flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the front surface of the 3442 and the rotating shaft penetrating the base cover 3442 and projecting rearward, and the flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the upper middle second drive motor 3443. A small-diameter, spur gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear that rotates integrally with a gear-shaped second drive gear 3444, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear 3445a that meshes with the second drive gear 3444, and a large-diameter transmission gear 3445a. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a and a gear portion 3446a which have 3445b and mesh with the second transmission gear 3445 which is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of the second transmission gear 3445. It has a columnar drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface, and a lift drive gear 3446 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and a drive pin 3446b of the lift drive gear 3446 are inserted and rearward. It has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding from the base, and is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the elevating drive gear 3446, and the base. It includes a second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and a flat plate-shaped gear cover 3447 that rotatably attaches the elevating drive gear 3446 in cooperation with the cover 3442.

Further, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and has a rotation detection sensor 3448 that detects the rotation position of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, and the unit base 3441 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. The assist spring 3449, which is attached in between and urges the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the direction in which the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 rises, and the whole band-shaped, penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction. The assist arm 3450, which has an assist slit 3450a and whose base end side is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and the assist arm 3450 are rotatably pressed from the front toward the unit base 3441 side. It is provided with an arm retainer 3451 attached to the front surface of the.

As shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 has a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, and a long hole extending in a predetermined direction through the front and rear A drive slit 3461b into which the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which the connection bush 3432 of the rotary connecting member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 protruding rearward. It has a columnar assist pin 3461d that is inserted into the 3450a, and rotates so as to close the shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 with the rear open and the open rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. It includes a rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back-up middle third drive motor 3436 mounted on the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. The spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotating shaft of the third drive motor 3464 on the back side meshes with the third drive gear 3464 and can be rotated by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. A rod-shaped transmission rack gear that meshes with the mounted spur gear-shaped drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. The 3466 and the transmission rack gear 3466 are meshed with each other and are rotatably attached by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with the insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461, and the rotation connecting member 3430 is connected to the front surface. It includes a spur gear-shaped driven pinion gear 3467 to which the rear end of the base 3431 is attached.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467, and the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. The outer side is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450, and the bush 3469 has a cylindrical shape with a flange, and the bush 3469 is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461. It is provided with a retaining cap 3470 to prevent the above.

The unit base 3441 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape in which the upper part of the left side of the front view of a quadrangle extending vertically protrudes to the left, and protrudes forward from the front of the lower part to rotate in the back-up middle. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably mounting the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 at the upper end of the front surface near the right end of the front view, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end of the front view.

The back-up second drive motor 3436 is attached near the upper end portion on the front surface of the base cover 3442. The rotary drive of the back-up second drive motor 3464 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445. It is mounted rotatably with (see FIG. 122).

The assist spring 3449 is a coil-shaped torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer circumference of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 by the arm retainer 3451.

The rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 extends to the left and right, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed in the lower right corner of the front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in the front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends to the left and right along the lower side longer than the transmission rack gear 3466, and has a slide groove 3461e that slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466, and a slide groove 3461e that protrudes upward from the upper right end of the front view to detect rotation. It includes a detection piece 3461f detected by a sensor.

The third drive motor 3464 in the back surface is mounted substantially in the center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c in the rotating unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer gear teeth that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and the driven pinion gear 3467 does not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion of the outer circumference where gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

Next, the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decorative unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3442 and the front surface of the decorative base 3481 at a position in front of the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 in the back upper middle drive unit 3440. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a translucent back upper right decorative board 3843 arranged in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481. , Is equipped.

The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can make the back upper right decorative body 348 light emitting decoration by emitting the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482. The back upper right decorative body 3483 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled on the game board 5 and has a general prize with the gate portion 2003 in the right-handed distribution space 2541 in the front-view right-handed game area 2540 of the center accessory 2500. It is located between the mouth 2001, and the inside of the upper right distribution space 2541 can be luminescent and decorated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

The back-up middle relay board 3490 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 is the back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420, the slide detection sensor 3426, and the back-up. The middle second drive motor 3443, the rotation detection sensor 3448, the back upper middle third drive motor 3464, the rotation detection sensor 3468, the back upper right decorative board 3482, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In the normal state, the upper side of the upper side of the movable effect unit 3400 is extended to the left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal, as shown in FIG. 123 (a). It is located slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441 in the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the lower end of the inside. In this state, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation support pin 3441a as the center acts due to the weight of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 or the like. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left side via the drive slit 3461b. Then, when the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is orthogonal to the extending direction of the drive slit 3461b. Since it is located below, the elevating drive gear 3446 tends to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end of the drive slit 3461b, the elevating drive gear 3446 cannot rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. Is maintained in the normal state, and the decorative body unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Further, in this state, since the elevating drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, a load is applied to the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

Further, in a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotary unit base 3461 is located at the moving end away from the rotary support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The driven pinion gear 3467 that meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 is rotationally positioned near the rotational end in the clockwise direction in front view. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is a base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in a normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 that extend and close horizontally in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 are the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center accessory 2500. It is located above the display screen of the player so that it can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 81 and the like).

From this normal state, when the elevating drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 in the back and forth, the elevating and lowering is performed. The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotationally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the pin 3441a as the center.

When the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) and on the left side in the front view. The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction in the front view around the rotation support pin 3441a, so that the assist pin 3461d causes the assist arm 3450 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view. As it rotates, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip end side thereof.

Then, when the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the normal state, the rotation drive of the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 stops, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461c. (The driven pinion gear 3467) is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 123 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 is in contact with the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d is in contact with the end portion on the tip side in the assist slit 3450a, and the back-up middle rotating unit 3460 is in contact with this. It is in a state where rotation is restricted.

In the state where the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, the back upper middle decoration is assembled on the game board 5. The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the second decorative body 3412 in the upper back) is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

With the decorative body unit 3410 on the back upper side moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven by the third drive motor 3436 on the back side via the third drive gear 3464 in the front view clockwise direction. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides to the right in the front view in the slide groove 3461e. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and is a rotary connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 also rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the connection base 3431 of the member 3430.

In the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the front view of the slide groove 3461e. In the present embodiment, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated by about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in the state where the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, it can be rotated by 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the normal state where it extends horizontally (FIG. 123 (FIG. 123). b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123 (b), the back-up middle first decorative body 3410 is driven to drive the back-up middle first decorative body 3410, and the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other. Move (see FIGS. 138 and 139, etc.).

As described above, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 has the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 having the pair of back-up middle first decoration body 3411 and the back-up middle second decoration body 3412, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down and rotate, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 can be opened and closed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411, the "mahjong" represented by the decoration of the back-up middle second decoration 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorations. Since the score of the "point stick" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be increased by the score of the "point stick".

[5-9 g. Movable production unit in front of the back]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled except for the back lower front decorative body unit, and FIG. 126 shows the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled except for the back lower front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 shows the back lower front decorative unit of the back lower front movable production unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing the decorative body unit elevating mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 130 (b) is an enlarged portion of the unit elevating pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). FIG. 131 (a) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b).

The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is an elevating unit that is attached to the front surface of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 that are provided with predetermined decorations and is attached to the front surface of the back lower front movable effect unit 3100. The 3502, the lower left decorative unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end of the elevating unit 3502, and the lower middle decorative unit 3504 attached to the left from the center of the elevating unit 3502 in the left-right direction of the front view. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 attached to the front of the elevating unit 3502 from the left side to the lower side of the back lower middle decoration unit 3504, and the back lower front relay board 3506 attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit 3502. It has.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable production unit 3500 is a plate-shaped extending left and right and has different decorations on both sides. The body 3510 and the first decorative body 3510 under the back are rotatably attached to the upper side extending to the left and right, and are attached to the elevating unit 3502 so as to be able to move up and down, and the front is decorated. It includes a second decorative body 3520.

The lower front decorative body 3510 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is a quadrangle having a front view extending long to the left and right, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front surface, and the rear side is open and transparent. The first front decorative member 3511 having lightness and the first front decorative member 3511 are attached to the rear surface and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface, and the front side is open and has a shallow box shape and translucency. The first back decorative member 3512, the lower back front first decorative substrate 3513 mounted between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, and the first One back decoration member 3512 has two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 protruding diagonally upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with the axes extending from the left and right ends of the front view, and the first back decoration. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 which projects from the right side surface of the member 3512 to the right in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 in the lower back front second decorative body 3520 described later. A flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516 projecting rearward from the right side of the front view of the first back decoration member 3512.

In the lower back front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in the front view is attached slightly to the left of the right end in the front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" tiles arranged side by side.

The back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger on the left and right and upper and lower than the back lower front first decorative body 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side so that the rear side is formed. A shallow, open, box-shaped, translucent second decorative member 3521, and a lower front second decorative substrate 3522, which is attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. , Front view of the flat plate-shaped substrate cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, which covers the rear of the lower front second decorative substrate 3522, and the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. It protrudes diagonally upward and forward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends to the left and right, and has a cylindrical shape for hinge-rotatably attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. The right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge part 3524 on the right side of the front view of the two second hinge parts 3524 and the two second hinge parts 3524, and the left end side is the front surface of the front lower front first decorative body 3510. A columnar hinge shaft 3525 inserted into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the view from the right side, and a left end of the front view of the second decorative member 3521 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the front view of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. A hinge retainer 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514 is provided.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front and the right side is open, and a rotation shaft penetrating the gear base 3527. A spur gear-shaped spur gear attached to the rotating shafts of the lower back front first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 so as to project to the right and the lower back front first drive motor 3528. The first drive gear 3529, the first transmission gear 3530 that meshes with the first drive gear 3529 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the first transmission gear 3530 mesh with each other and rotate to the gear base 3527. In the front view left side of the transmission second gear 3531 which is possibly attached, the first elevating gear 3532 which is meshed with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the gear base 3527. A slit that rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, extends on the axis passing through the center of rotation, and slidably inserts the decorative elevating pin 3515 of the lower front first decorative body 3510. The decorative elevating arm 3533 having 3533a, and the gear base 3527 so as to cover the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first elevating gear 3532 on the right side of the front view. It is provided with a flat gear cover 3534 which is closed on the open right end side and is attached to the gear base 3527.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the front left side surface of the second decorative member 3521, and is a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. , A sensor cover 3536 attached to the front left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in the front view. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 that protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523 are provided.

In the lower back front decorative unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative elevating pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, and the transmission first A decorative body elevating mechanism in which a gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, a first elevating gear 3532, and a decorative body elevating arm 3533 move the lower back front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation with respect to an axis extending to the left and right. It constitutes 3501A.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is formed at the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a long hole-shaped elevating slit 3540 that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. , Prepared. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the elevating slit 3540 has both ends extending to the left and right formed at the same height, and a portion of the upper side extending to the left and right that is closer to the right from the left end in the front view. It has a lock protrusion 3540a projecting downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed so that the left side of the front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the leftmost semicircular arc of the elevating slit 3540, and the right side of the front view is the elevating slit. It is formed in a straight line extending diagonally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of the 3540 toward the left end of the portion extending horizontally to the left. The lower side extending to the left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper side so as to form a substantially constant distance from the upper side.

The elevating unit 3502 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is located between the flat plate-shaped unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the lower back front decorative unit 3501. The rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 with a gap that can accommodate the part below the front first decorative body 3510. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotating shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and A second transmission gear 3554 that meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arcuate second elevating gear 3555a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3554. A flat plate-shaped main body 3555b that is approximately half a circle concentric with the arc of the second elevating gear 3555a, a shaft hole 3555c that penetrates through the center of the main body 3555b and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and A unit elevating arm 3555 having an arm portion 3555d extending from the main body portion 3555b in a direction away from the second elevating gear 3555a, and a front lower back decoration attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d in the unit elevating arm 3555. A columnar unit elevating pin 3556a slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the body unit 3501 and extending from the front end of the unit elevating pin 3556a to the shaft hole 3555c side along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555. A flat plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b, and an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c that protrudes rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b and has a rear end attached to the front surface of the main body 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555. It has.

The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached to the unit base 3550 so as to rotate about a position near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed so that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is attached to the unit elevating detection sensor 3557 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and can detect the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and is attached to the right end portion of the front view on the front surface of the unit base 3550. A slide base 3558 that extends vertically, a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that extends vertically and is slidably attached to the front side of the slide base 3558, and a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that is slidably attached to the front side of the intermediate slider 3559. The front surface of the cage is provided with a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 that is attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

In this elevating unit 3502, the lower front second drive motor 3552, the second drive gear 3553, the second transmission gear 3554, the unit elevating arm 3555, the arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556a), the slide base 3558, and the intermediate slider 3559 , And the mounting slider 3560 constitutes a decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A that elevates and elevates the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 on the base end side, penetrates back and forth and extends toward the tip side, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. A guide bush that is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651 and the guide arm 3651 that has the guide slit 3651a, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm retainer rotatably supporting the rear surface of the guide arm 3651 on the base end side and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550. It includes an assist spring 3565 in which both ends are attached to the arm retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563, respectively, and the ahem retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563 are urged in a direction approaching each other. The guide arm 3651 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the right in the upper left of the front view, and the tip side extends to the right.

The back left lower decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable production unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the unit base 3550, and a three-dimensional decoration imitating the "mahjong" "tile" is formed on the front. The back left lower decorative body 3560 and the back left lower decorative board 3651 which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the back left lower decorative body 3560 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. The lower left back decorative unit 3503 can illuminate the lower left back decorative body 3560 by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left back decorative substrate 3651. The lower left decorative unit 3503 is located behind the side unit 2300 when assembled on the game board 5, and the vicinity of the side unit 2300 in the game area 5a can be light-emitting and decorated.

The under-back middle decoration unit 3504 of the under-back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the part on the left side of the center in the front left-right direction on the front surface of the base cover 3551, and the decoration of the characters "Dokun" is formed. It is provided with a back lower middle decorative body 3570 having a property, and a back lower middle decorative board 3571 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decorative body 3570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back lower middle decoration unit 3504 can make the back lower middle decoration body 3570 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the back lower middle decoration substrate 3571. When assembled on the game board 5, the lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the side unit lower 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a.

The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit lower 2200 downward and discharge them. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is a transparent flat passage member 3580 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate shape which closes the open front surface of the passage member 3580. It includes a cover 3581 and a side rear decorative substrate 3582 that is attached to the front of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200 under the side unit is installed. Further, the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is located behind the side unit lower 2200 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the LED of the side rear decorative board 3582 is appropriately emitted to light the side unit lower 2200. It can be decorated with light emission.

The back bottom front relay board 3506 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 includes a back bottom front first decorative board 3513, a back bottom front second decorative board 3522, a back bottom front first drive motor 3528, and a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535. The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit elevating detection sensor 3557, the lower left decorative board 3651, the lower back middle decorative board 3571, the side rear decorative board 3582, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is relaying the connection.

Subsequently, the operation of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the like, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 has the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 located at the lower end and the back lower front decorative unit 3501 in the normal state. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is positioned in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 by rotating the hinge so as to descend. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 of the elevating unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d and back. The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decorative unit 3501 is located near the right end of the front view in the elevating slit 3540. Further, the guide arm 3651 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state in which the tip thereof extends substantially horizontally toward the right side in the front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end of the front view in the guide slit 3651a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevating detection sensor 3557.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body elevating arm 3553 in the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 extends downward from the center of rotation. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510, which is inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3553, is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side close to the center of rotation. There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520.

In this normal state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500, and is a front lower back decoration unit. The first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

Under normal conditions, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 rotates the unit elevating arm 3555 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in the ascending direction about the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a pushes the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises. Since the right end portion of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the front lower front decorative unit 3501 rises straight without tilting.

As the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. Then, when the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left side of the front view from the lowermost protruding portion of the lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward in the elevating slit 3540, the drive of the lower back front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the ascending end by the drive unit 3502 (decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A) (first ascending position). ) (See FIG. 131 (b)).

In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center (shaft hole 3555c) of the unit elevating arm 3555. Due to the weight of the front decorative unit 3501, a rotational moment that causes the unit elevating arm 3555 to rotate clockwise in the front view acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), on the left side surface of the lock projection 3540a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540 to which the unit elevating pin 3556a is in contact, the portion on the right side of the abutting portion is Since it has invaded the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the turning range of the unit elevating pin 3556a, the invading part is required to revolve so that the lock protrusion 3540a moves downward. The lock protrusion 3540a (lower back front decorative unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the lower back front decorative unit 3501 so that is moved to the outside of the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotational moment acting on the elevating pin 3556a is canceled, and the unit elevating arm 3555 is maintained (locked) in a state of being positioned at the elevating end without rotating in the front-view clockwise direction.

In the state where the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is the center accessory 2500 in front view. It is in a state of being located in the frame, and the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side.

Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530 are driven by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. When the decorative body elevating arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 enters the slit 3533a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the first hinge portion 3514 so that the decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front first decorative body 3510 is pressed forward and the lower side of the lower back lower front first decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 hinges around the second hinge portion 3524.

Then, when the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the rotation of the back lower front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is back lower front second. It is in a state of being located above the decorative body 3520 (elevated position or open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510, which was initially facing forward, is in a state of facing backward, and instead, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 facing rearward. The second back decorative member 3512 facing the second decorative member 3521 is located above the second decorative member 3521 and whose front surface is substantially on the same surface as the second decorative member 3521 and faces forward. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form one large decoration (decoration of the character "Wa") (FIG. 131 (Fig. 131). c)).

In the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is rotated to open the hinge, the center accessory 2500 is viewed from the front in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. A substantially lower half of the inside of the frame (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 141).

In this way, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 in a state of being stopped at the position of the rising end even when the lower back front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the lower back front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. Further, since the unit elevating pin 3556a revolving in the ascending direction is locked in the middle, when the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked at the ascending end position, the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked. It does not make an unnatural movement such as lowering, and the movement of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501, as an operation of raising the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending to the left and right to raise the back, so that the sliding is linear. Since the part of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that can be seen from the player side changes from moment to moment, it can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. By rotating the hinge of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 to open it, the first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 that cannot be seen in a normal state The second decorative member 3521 of the above can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141. FIG. 132 shows a state in which the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are rotated together in a normal position in the movable effect unit after the back of the back unit so that the second decorative surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. In FIG. 133, the back lower rear movable effect unit is closed with the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body, and the first decorative surface of the lower back rear first decorative body is turned to the front. In the state, slide and move it to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body of the back-up left movable production unit to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the moved state. FIG. 134 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133. While turning the decorative surface to the front, open the back upper left second decorative body by hinge-rotating the back upper left movable production unit to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body first. (Ii) It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative member facing the front. FIG. 135 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative surface faces the front.

FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end of the front view. FIG. 137 is a front-view counterclockwise direction in which the back-up-middle decorative body unit of the back-up-middle movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back-up-middle decorative body unit extends diagonally downward to the left in the front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being rotated in the clockwise direction. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to a position in the half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a position in the fully open state. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower back front first decorative body is hinged and raised above the back lower front second decorative body from the state of FIG. 140.

In a normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. 81 and the like. , Can be clearly seen from the player side (front). In this normal state, the hinge of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the rotatable back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3120 is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of the 3110 is directed forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are hinged to rotate the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The second decorative body 3220 on the back left is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211. The front side is invisible from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end of the front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, in a normal state, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A part of the front view center accessory 2500 is visible forward through the frame.

Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded so as to descend to the side, the lower end of the front view below the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that the lower back front decorative unit 3501 does not face forward from the frame of the center accessory 2500. Is located in.

The game board 5 is after the back of the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect). ..

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is viewed in a plan view by the back lower rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotation drive unit 3130. Rotate in the clockwise direction to face the rearward facing second decorative surface 3122 to the front (see FIG. 132). At this time, the lower back first decorative body 3110, which is closed and located in front of the lower back second decorative body 3120, is pushed by the lower back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By blocking a part of the displayed production image, the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be made to stand out, and the "heavenly luck" applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom The decoration of "" can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can be made to think that there is something good and the expectation for the game can be raised.

Further, as an effect (movable effect) using the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3150 of the slide unit 3150 is the third. The drive motor 3155 slides and moves the rotary drive unit 3130 to the position at the left end of the front view while keeping the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 closed, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 slightly rotates the lower rear first decorative body 3110 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view so that the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 are back-up left first by the back-up left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. With the first decorative member 3221 facing the front while being closed with respect to the decorative body 3210, the first decorative member 3221 is slid and moved to the position at the right end of the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 (see FIG. 133).

In the state shown in FIG. 133, an axis extending vertically for hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, and the back upper left The vertical axis for hinge-rotating the back-up left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back-up left first decorative body 3210 of the movable production unit 3200 is located coaxially with the left and right of the game area 5a. It is almost the same as the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3220 on the upper left side are diagonally arranged within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. It is located in front of. As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom to the center side and the appearance of the second decorative body 3220 on the back top left.

Then, in a state where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (state of FIG. 133), the rotation drive unit 3130 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower back first decorative body 3110 folded by the lower back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the lower back second decorative body 3120, and the lower back The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120 so that the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back upper left is the back upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the movable production unit 3200. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, and the back upper left first. The second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left is arranged on the right side of the decorative body 3210, and the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 are directed to the front (see FIG. 134).

In the state of FIG. 134, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is lined up on the left and right sides of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable effect unit 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of being united vertically in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It almost covers the front of the display screen. Further, the second decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The characters "Jakusei" written vertically are written on the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, respectively. It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body will appear within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which will have a great impact on the player and give a chance such as a "big hit game". It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game and raise the expectation for the game.

By the way, in the above description, the effect of opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 of the back lower rear movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 at the same time has been described. As shown in 135, only the first decorative body 3110 after the back of the movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. Then, the word "holy" will be visible first. At this time, since the cutout decoration 3170 such as "one" is applied to the upper side of the character "holy", the decoration that is a set for the player to complete the cutout decoration 3170 on this upper side. It is possible to recognize that there is (cut-out decoration 3260), and whether or not the decoration that is the set appears (whether or not the second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left opens by hinge rotation) makes the player It is possible to make the player feel excited and to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid and moved to the appearance position on the right side of the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decoration 3320 located directly behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 is to the right of the back left fixed decoration 3310 in the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located at and is visible from the player side (see FIG. 136). In this state, if a predetermined effect image is displayed in the area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the rear, the player can be reminded. It is possible to give the illusion that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 is movable. When the decorative body 3320 appears, the back left can be moved with the illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to be paired with the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) on the right side. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first decorative body 3110 after the underside can be greatly enjoyed.

Further, as an effect using the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3460 is driven by the back-up middle third drive motor 3436. Rotate the 3410 to the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end side raised. (Fig. 137). As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, which was located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, descends to the center position while rotating, and the movement causes the player to move the back-up middle decoration. Expectations for the game that can draw attention to the unit 3410 and make me think that there may be something good by moving the decoration unit 3410 on the back in a form reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". You can enhance the feeling.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end and extends diagonally, and is closed by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in the intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are formed between the pair of the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since it is in a state of facing forward, it is possible to remind the player of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong", and it seems that the possibility of "big hit game" has increased, and expectation. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, from the state of FIG. 138, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are further slid in the directions away from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 to be in the fully open state, as shown in FIG. 139, the pair The central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward from between the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. It is possible to remind the player of the "Mahjong" "Mahjong", and to be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn is a "big hit". It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back lower front movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 and is in a folded state. Then, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 raises the lower back front decorative unit 3501 from the position of the lower end to the position of the ascending end. When the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in front view, and the game is played. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be clearly seen from the person side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below to cover the lower part of the front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be made to suggest the arrival of an opportunity, which gives a feeling of expectation for the game. It can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" tiles lined up. By raising the front decorative member 3511 and making it visible, it is possible to entertain the player with the illusion that his tiles are lined up.

Then, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, the lower back front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body elevating mechanism 3501A) is used. When the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so as to rise and is positioned above the lower back front second decorative body 3520, the lower back front which was previously invisible The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the front lower back front decorative body 3510 are arranged one above the other. In this state, in front view, substantially the lower half of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. The decoration of the first back decorative member 3512 and the decoration of the second decorative member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the characters "Wa") (Fig. 141). See). As a result, the first table decorative member 3511, which is decorated with multiple "mahjong tiles" lined up side by side, hinges around the axis extending to the left and right, and the character "Wa" means "going up". Because the decoration of the above appears, it is possible to convince the player that the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "big hit", and it is interesting to expect the occurrence of the "big hit game". Can be enhanced.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, although detailed illustration is omitted. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, the general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and detects the game ball received in the first major winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid are used. A drive signal is output to the 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol storage indicator of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port. , The second special symbol storage display, the normal symbol display, the normal symbol storage display, the game status display, the round display, etc., output the drive signal.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, while a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551 And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters. The detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or something. Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. It may be transmitted to the control unit 1511. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. Launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, ball tank 802, tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blades 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blades 839 are difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is notified. Is displayed, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number " When "5" is displayed, it is notified that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and a number is displayed. When "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Is displayed to notify that the player is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the firing reference pulse inputs the driving current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition to this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal 921 for bass of the main body frame 4 and a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance as the schedule data progresses. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, the VDP outputs an executing signal to the display control MPU to that effect when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU. To do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer is used. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81, 87, 92, 142, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls per minute can be continuously driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guidance portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the game released from the central guidance portion 2531 because the central guidance portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002. The ball is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. It is released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. The opening / closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example) by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball cannot be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easier to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and if the number of ordinary random numbers is more than four, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being retained. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variablely displayed). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated by the second special lottery result. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004 includes "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, it is normal after the jackpot game ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than the probability of winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , Eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when a game ball is accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first big prize opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / closed pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state). If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to execute a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls can be accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will surely be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in a non-time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state (the state in which both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is accepted in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired on the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is not held and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 143 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers or RAM as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been created. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the RAM of the main control MPU. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Execute the recovery process to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) used for lottery processing for a display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used in the lottery process for the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), corresponding to the fluctuation display of the above special symbols Reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (a state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or left, middle, and The reach random number used in the lottery process to determine whether or not all the decorative symbols on the right are displayed in a synchronized manner so that they are the same symbol, and if it is determined to be a jackpot based on the above special random number, a jackpot The symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers) used in the lottery process for determining the type, and the lottery process related to the winning of the hit that triggers the operation of the second starting door member 2549. It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different counters. It may be made different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control that is periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the first major winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the first Detection signals from various switches such as the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 and the general winning opening sensor 3015 are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start door member 2549 as the process of step S15. .. In this normal symbol process process as well, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is subjected to the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door member 2549 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the normal fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit occurs, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is extended, and the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened is increased, so that such a time saving state is realized.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18. ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S19, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the large winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the ON state, the above payout control is performed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the board 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of holds as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 2104, as shown in FIG. 144. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter, and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute the first start port passing process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2551 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot control for controlling the jackpot game is performed. The process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R probability variation jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", and "8R probability variation jackpot". Based on this, the opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and the opening and closing control of the second big winning opening 2006 is performed based on the aspect suggesting "10R probability variation big hit". In addition, based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the opening and closing control of the first prize opening 2005 is performed to "4R". The second big prize opening based on the mode suggesting "probability change big hit", "5R probability change big hit", "6R probability change big hit", "7R probability change big hit", "8R probability change big hit", and "16R probability change big hit". The opening and closing of 2006 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the change display of the first special symbol is stopped is the mode suggesting "10R probability variation jackpot", and the change of the second special symbol The result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the display is stopped suggests "4R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", and "16R probability variation jackpot". When the jackpot game based on the mode is ended, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot". When the jackpot game based on the above is ended, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state suggests "2R probability variation jackpot". When the big hit game based on the fact that it has become a big hit is finished, the time saving flag is set to execute the time saving control (control of the time saving state) until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the big hit game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is the mode suggesting "8R normal big hit", after the big hit game By setting "72" in the fluctuation count counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) and setting the time saving flag, the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) after the big hit game (Ii) The time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is the mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the second special Depending on the lottery result, one of "18", "36", "54", and "72" is set in the fluctuation number counter and the time saving flag is set to set the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) after the big hit game. (Ii) The time saving control (control of the time saving state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) reaches the number corresponding to the result of the second special lottery out of 18, 36, 54, and 72 times. In addition, a high probability flag is set when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot) is completed. By doing so, the probability improvement control (control of the high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high probability time saving state if both the high probability flag and the time saving flag are set, and the high probability non-time saving state if only the high probability flag is set without the time saving flag being set. Control, if only the time saving flag is set without setting the high probability flag, control to the low probability time saving state (so-called time saving state), and if neither the high probability flag nor the time saving flag is set, the low probability Control to a non-time saving state (so-called normal state).

On the other hand, if the big hit executing flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit executing flag is set. If it is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is based on the mode suggesting "small hit". The opening and closing of the first prize opening 2005 is controlled.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is ". On condition that it is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is held. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is applied. The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 2104 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S31, as shown in FIG. 145. In the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S41, a counter value by a first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the start of variable display of the first special symbols into the pending state. The processes of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S44, each random number thus acquired is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Store in.

However, in the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the start of variable display of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, the main control MPU hits or small hits the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed or the mode of the game effect to be executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information such as the type before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2551 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 146. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to put the start of variable display of the second special symbol into a new pending state. The processes of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S54, each random number thus acquired is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Store in.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the start of variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, By comparing with variable random numbers, whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, reach as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The effect is executed, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If so, the high-probability jackpot judgment value is compared with the first special random number to identify whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and if the high-probability flag is not set, the low-probability jackpot judgment value and the first By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later and is the same as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the first special random number. The low-probability jackpot determination value (3937-3946), which is a numerical value, is set in the low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later, and is the jackpot determination value to be compared with the first special random number. It has the same random number value. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot is set as the pre-judgment information "big hit 1 to 12", not the big hit. It can be classified into either "off" or "reach 1-4".

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passing process, the same disorder is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not the small hit is obtained. These high-probability or low-probability small hit determination values (3800-3812) are set in the high-probability or low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)), which will be described later, and are set to the first special random number. It is a random number value that is the same as the small hit judgment value to be compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not the hit is a small hit, and the "big hit 9 to 12" including the small hit as the pre-judgment information is obtained. Can be classified.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is set, it is judged whether or not it will be a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value By comparing with the second special random number, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later and is the same as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the second special random number. The low-probability jackpot determination value (3937-3946), which is a numerical value, is set in the low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later, and is the jackpot determination value to be compared with the second special random number. It has the same random number value. Therefore, by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the hit is a big hit, and the pre-judgment information is "big hit 1 to 12", which is a big hit, and is not a big hit. It can be classified into either "off" or "reach 1-4".

In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is not executed in the time saving state (time saving time) when the time saving control is executed. There is. On the other hand, in the effect pre-determination process executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the time saving control is not executed in the non-time saving state (non-time saving time). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is controlled in the non-time saving state, only the effect pre-determination process based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is executed, and the time saving state is controlled. In this case, only the effect pre-determination process based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is executed.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that the first special random number and the pre-judgment table will be a big hit, a judgment value indicating which big hit will be made. When the type of big hit is specified by comparing with the first symbol random number and the fact that it is a big hit is specified by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, a judgment indicating which big hit is to be made. The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, a determination value indicating that a specific 1 (2R probability variation jackpot) jackpot is obtained by matching with the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) to be described later. It is set to the same random number value as the judgment value (0-16) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 among the judgment values compared with one symbol random number, and by matching with the first special random number, it is specified 6 (8R probability variation big hit). ) Or the judgment value indicating that it is a big hit of non-specific 2 (8R normal big hit) is among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later and compared with the first symbol random number. It is set to the same random number value as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 6 or non-specific 2, and when it matches with the first special random number, it is a big hit of specific 7 (10R probability variation big hit). The judgment value indicating that the value is set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later, and the judgment value indicating that the specific 7 is a big hit among the judgment values to be compared with the first symbol random number ( It has the same random number value as 155-159).

Similarly, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that the second special random number and the pre-judgment table will be a big hit, it is determined which big hit is to be made. When the type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number, and when it is specified that the jackpot will be a jackpot by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, which jackpot will be used is shown. The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the jackpot is a specific 1 (2R probability variation jackpot) or a non-specific 1 (2R normal jackpot) by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table (FIG. 152 (FIG. 152). C) Set to) and the same random number value as the judgment value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 among the judgment values to be compared with the second symbol random number. By matching with the second special random number, specific 2 (4R probability variation jackpot), specific 3 (5R probability variation jackpot), specific 4 (6R probability variation jackpot), specific 5 (7R probability variation jackpot), specific 6 (8R probability variation jackpot) The judgment value indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot is a jackpot of specific 2 to specific 6 among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. The random number value is the same as the judgment value (20-55) indicating the above, and the judgment value indicating that the big hit of the specific 8 (16R probability variation big hit) is obtained by matching with the second special random number is the symbol determination table (described later). (See FIG. 152 (C)), the random number value is the same as the judgment value (56-159) indicating that the specific 8 is a big hit among the judgment values to be compared with the second symbol random number.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be performed, a plurality of types of reach effects are produced by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. Identify which of the reach effects will be executed to win the jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpots of the specific 7 and the specific 8 is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super reach effect (hereinafter, also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is a judgment to be compared with the variable random number. Of the values, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, and a specific of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter, this is also referred to as strong SP reach). The judgment value (30-216) indicating that the super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is executed is the jackpot expectation degree other than the specific super reach effect among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that a high super reach effect is executed, and the judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is Among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random numbers, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed.

In addition, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 2 to 6 or the non-specific 2 is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the above is executed, and the judgment value (30-216) indicating that the super reach effect other than the specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high expectation of big hit is a variable random number. Of the judgment values to be compared, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is specified. The judgment value (217-240) indicating that the super reach effect of is executed is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. There is.

Further, the determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpot of specific 1 or non-specific 1 is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (90-189), which is the same random number and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is the judgment value to be compared with the variable random number and executes the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the game is to be performed, and the judgment value (190-216) indicating that a super reach effect other than a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high expectation of big hit is compared with the variable random number. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with high jackpot expectation is executed, which is other than the specific super reach effect, and the specific super of the super reach effect with high jackpot expectation. The determination value (217-240) indicating that the reach effect is executed is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers.

Therefore, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the pre-judgment table, the type of jackpot is accurately specified and pre-judgment is performed. As information, from "big hit 1" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from normal reach, "big hit 2" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from weak SP reach, and strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big hit 3" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8, "Big hit 4" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from a specific strong SP reach, and special 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hit from normal reach Included "Big Hit 5", Specific 2-6 from Weak SP Reach or "Big Hit 6" including Non-Specific 2 Big Hit, Specific 2-6 or Non-Specific 2 from Strong SP Reach other than Specific Strong SP Reach "Big hit 7" including the big hit of, "Big hit 8" including the big hit of specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 from the specific strong SP reach, "Big hit 8" including the big hit of the specific 1 or non-specific 1 from the normal reach 9 ”,“ Big hit 10 ”which is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 from a weak SP reach,“ Big hit 11 ”which is a big hit of a specific 1 or non-specific 1 from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, It can be classified into either a specific 1 from a specific strong SP reach or a "big hit 12" which is a big hit of a non-specific 1.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that the deviation occurs, the reach is displayed when the high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change indicating that the reach is to be performed and the reach random number, it is specified whether or not to display the reach, and the control of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is executed without the high probability flag being set. When only the time saving flag indicating that the item is set is set, the reach is specified by comparing the reach judgment value at the time saving time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number, and it is specified whether or not to display the reach. When the probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach is displayed by comparing the reach judgment value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number. Specify whether to display or not. The reach judgment value (0) at the time of the probability change is set to the reach judgment table at the time of the probability change (see FIG. 152 (B)) described later, and is set to the same random number value as the reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number. The time reach judgment value (0-5) is set to the reach judgment table for time reduction (see FIG. 152 (B)) described later, and is set to the same random number value as the reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to the reach determination table (see FIG. 152 (B)) at the normal time, which will be described later, and is set to the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. .. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the big hit is not obtained, and in advance. The determination information can be classified into either "off" that does not display reach (executes reach effect) or "reach 1 to 4" that displays reach (executes reach effect).

The reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of shortening the time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. , When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether to display the reach (execute the reach effect) in the game state of the probability change time, the time reduction time, or the normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is possible to determine whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in any of the game states of the probability change time, the time reduction time, and the normal time. Can be identified.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the variable random number are set. By comparing, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0-163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and among the determination values to be compared with the variation random number, the normal reach effect. The judgment value (164-222), which is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the above is executed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) described later. ) Is set to the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with low jackpot expectation is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number, and is specified among the super reach effects with high jackpot expectation. The judgment value (223-235) indicating that the super reach effect other than the above is executed is set in the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and is a specific super reach among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. A random number value that is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the effect is executed, and a determination indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. The value (236-240) is the same as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values set in the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the fluctuation random number. It is a random number. Therefore, by comparing the variable random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and the normal reach effect is executed as the pre-judgment information "reach 1". "Reach 2" that executes low super reach production, "Reach 3" that executes super reach production with high jackpot expectation (other than specific super reach production), super reach production with high jackpot expectation (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, the pre-determination information can be classified into any of "reach 1" to "reach 4".

As described above, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number). As a result of comparison with (variable random numbers), whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As shown in FIG. 148 (B), "missing", "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" are specified as pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed. , "Reach 1" to "Reach 4" are classified into any of 17 types.

Then, in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed, etc.) and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number). And the number of holds (value of the hold number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number, and the pre-judgment command corresponding to the set. For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the number of reserved first special symbols are held. (Value of the first special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to (step S62). Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start port (first start port 2002, second start) in which the start winning is generated occurs. Either one of the mouths 2004), in addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the start mouth, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit or a small hit, and a big hit. If it becomes a big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is input. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU stores the first reserved storage area for storing the pre-determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second storage area for storing the pre-determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol. A hold storage area is provided. Further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved items, and the peripheral control MPU first receives the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Stores in order from the (first) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. The variable pattern command (the first variable pattern command that notifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol) that stores the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the variation display start notification (second variation pattern command) is received, the first storage area (if the first variation pattern command is received, the first storage area of the first hold storage area) is stored according to the received variation pattern command. Area, if the second variation pattern command is received, the pre-judgment information stored in the second storage area (first storage area) is discarded and the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area (N = 2-4) is discarded. It is stored in the Nth storage area of the first hold storage area if the first fluctuation pattern command is received, and in the Nth storage area of the second hold storage area if the second fluctuation pattern command is received). The pre-determination information is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). Whether to start the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol can be specified by the variation pattern command (whether it is the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command). ), And if it is specified to start the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the pre-judgment information stored in the first hold storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified to start the variation display of the second special symbol based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the pre-determination information stored in the second hold storage area is shifted. As a result, the pre-judgment information of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is memorized so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information. Become so.

In this example, the random numbers are the same as the jackpot determination value in the pre-judgment table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later, but the random numbers are not limited to this. For example, the jackpot judgment value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, or a part or all of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table is different from the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table. It may be configured to include a random value of a number, and the degree of possibility of a big hit may be determined in the effect pre-determination process.

Specifically, a part of the deviation judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value can be discriminated as a high-probability random number group, and the high-probability random number group can be discriminated. The ratio of the jackpot determination value to the deviation determination value, which can be discriminated as Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are classified into either the above-mentioned loss judgment value or the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value, and this is not executed for the above-mentioned jackpot judgment. By judging whether or not the winning random number used for the same judgment belongs to the above-mentioned high-probability random number group in which the jackpot judgment value and the losing judgment value are mixed, the holding state is maintained. Each determination process is provided with a pseudo-probability advance determination means that enables advance determination of the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning, and the pseudo-probability advance determination means is used to determine the jackpot winning. The degree of expectation may be determined in advance.

By providing a means with a high-probability random number determination in which a jackpot judgment value and a loss judgment value are mixed in this way, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment, which is still in a pending state, may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the above-mentioned jackpot winning according to the mixing ratio of the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value in the high-probability random number determination means is the same. The advance judgment becomes feasible. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the advance determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When, the expectation regarding the winning of the big hit when the judgment process based on the random number value (the value belonging to the low-probability random number group having a pair relationship with the high-probability random number group) that is not the special hit judgment value determined in advance is digested. It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected degree of jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

According to the preceding judgment method for such a high-probability random number group, when a specific judgment process is put on hold, the jackpot judgment is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state). , The expectation (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display according to the hold digestion is performed. Will be done.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80)
2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 143).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 150, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the first. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the suspension of the variable display start is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 152 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 152 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 152 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at a low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, as in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment table, 10 kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 13 kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hit determination value indicating that the hit was won and the 3924 types of first special random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been done, and there is no chance of winning a small hit. In this low-probability jackpot determination table, as in the pre-judgment table, 10 types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 3937 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 90 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are similar to the above-mentioned preliminary determination table. Matches the big hit judgment value, matches the small hit judgment value indicating that 19 kinds of first special random numbers have won the small hit, and 3838 kinds of first special random numbers match the missed judgment value. One special random number is associated with each other. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state). ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been done, and there is no chance of winning a small hit. In this high-probability jackpot determination table, as in the above-mentioned preliminary determination table, 90 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot determination table are generated. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won and the outlier determination value indicating that the 3857 types of second special random numbers are out of the above.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S116), the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. If it is determined to be a small hit as a result of comparison with a random number (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set and the process is terminated (step S118). As a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined that the random number is out of order, the reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. Compare with the reach random number read in step S119 (step S119).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 152 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). Reach judgment table for time and use when the game state is short time (low probability time saving state) Used when the game state is normal time (normal state: low probability non-time saving state) It is equipped with a normal reach judgment table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, as in the above-mentioned preliminary determination table, the reach determination value indicates that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 238 types of reach random numbers do not reach. The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

Further, in the reach determination table at the time of shortening the time, similarly to the above-mentioned preliminary determination table, the reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values and the reach determination values indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the time saving time (low probability time saving state) than in the probability change time (high probability state).

Further, in the reach judgment table at the normal time, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as the reach random numbers set in the reach judgment table at the time of probability change and the time reduction are reached, as in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability change time (high probability state) and the time reduction time (low probability time reduction state).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is out of reach as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the variation Sets the reach flag indicating that is the reach, and ends the process (step S120b).

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 153. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 152 (C). (Step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 152 (C), the symbol determination table includes each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation jackpot, specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot, specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot, and specific 4 6R probability variation jackpot, specific 5 7R probability variation jackpot, specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot, specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot, non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot, non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot) and symbol random numbers (first symbol) Random numbers, second symbol random numbers) are stored in an associated form. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number, the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. 1. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the 2R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game to the next big hit. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), the time saving control is executed until the next big hit. Big hit 2. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which a game ball can enter, and a 4R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 4R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot that executes both 3. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which a game ball can enter, and a 5R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 5R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot that executes both 4. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 6R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 6R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 6R probability variation jackpot of specific 4 5. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 7R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 7R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 7R probability variation jackpot of specific 5 6. If it is the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, the 8R big hit game is executed, and from the end of the 8R big hit game to the next big hit. If the probability improvement control is executed and the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the time saving control is performed until the next big hit, and if it is the second special lottery result The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 8R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 8R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 8R probability variation jackpot of specific 6 7. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 10R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 10R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 10R probability variation jackpot of specific 7 8. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 16R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 16R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8 9. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the 2R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is not executed from the end of the 2R big hit game until the next big hit. Therefore, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state), the fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed a predetermined number of times after the end of the 2R jackpot game. Non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot that executes time reduction control until it is executed 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which a game ball can enter, and the 8R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is not executed from the end of the 8R big hit game until the next big hit. Therefore, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state), the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R jackpot game. It is determined to be one of the 10 types of jackpots of the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot that executes the time saving control until it is done.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of jackpot and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1; the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6; the 10R probability variation jackpot of the specific 7; While the distribution of the judgment value is set for the 8R normal jackpot of the specific 2, the 2R probability variable jackpot of the specific 1 and the 4R probability variable jackpot of the specific 2 are specified in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. Judgment value distribution is set for 5R probability variation jackpot of 3, 6R probability variation jackpot of specific 4, 7R probability variation jackpot of specific 5, 8R probability variation jackpot of specific 6, 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8, and 2R normal jackpot of non-specific 1. Has been done.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled or a big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, a big hit game (a game ball can be entered). (Limited to those controlled to open and close according to the mode), a so-called right-handed game is performed in which the game ball is driven to the right of the front view from the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, an obstacle nail is not planted in front of the game panel 1100. Then, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, when the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is hit. It is designed to always win a prize in the winning opening 2006. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing control of the second big winning opening 2006 is performed, the game ball hit into the right-handed game area 2540 is not wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c)). You can digest the big hit game in a short time.

On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions between the right-handed game area 2540 and the first prize opening 2005, the game ball is the obstacle. By contacting the nail, various movements are given to the game ball so that it flows down. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, even if the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is won. This is not always the case, and the game balls that have not won the first major winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. As described above, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and closed in the present embodiment, the game ball is more efficient than the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. The second big winning opening 2006 will be won, and the big hit game can be digested in a short time.

Further, in this example, in the condition of changing the first prize opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state in one round in the opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005, and in the opening / closing control of the second prize opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second prize opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are changed to the closed state about 30 seconds after being controlled to the open state, but even before that time. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, the game is changed to the closed state. Then, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, the first big winning opening 2005 is changed to the closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big winning opening 2005. In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the second big winning opening 2006 is changed to the closed state based on the fact that 10 game balls are won in the second big winning opening 2006. In this way, in the big hit game that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005, only seven game balls can be won in the first big winning opening 2005, so only seven prize balls are won per round. On the other hand, in the big hit game that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006, a maximum of 10 game balls can be won in the second big winning opening 2006, and a prize ball for 10 prizes can be obtained per round. In the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and closed, more prize balls can be expected to be obtained than in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined. If it is decided to be a symbol and it is decided to be a 10R probability variation jackpot of specific 7, it is decided to be a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to be an 8R normal jackpot of non-specific 2, it is 8R normal of the first special symbol. Decide on a big hit design. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. (Step S125), if the small hit flag is not set, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S126).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S127, one of these lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, or loss) is instructed (stop symbol of the first special symbol). The determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted. After that, as the process of step S128, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU sets a specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If specified, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are specific odd symbols (for example, "7")) is determined, and if the 16R probability variation jackpot of the specific 8 is specified, the 16R probability variation The jackpot symbol (a combination in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are specific odd symbols (for example, "7")) is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game production), the symbol is determined. The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of all the specific odd-numbered symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is a 10R probability variation jackpot of the specific 7 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the first special lottery. Among the big hits caused by each of the result and the second special lottery result, the number of rounds is the largest, and the acquisition of the 10R big hit game that makes it easy to win the game ball to the second big winning opening 2006 has been confirmed. It can be determined that.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. When the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7") is determined and the 5R probability variation jackpot of specific 3 is specified among the jackpots. Is determined to be a 5R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". It is common with the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol), and among the jackpots, a specific 4 6R probability variation When a jackpot is specified, the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". Common to the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 5R probability variation jackpot symbol). When the 7R probability variation jackpot of the specific 5 is specified among the jackpots, the 7R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". 4R probability variation If the jackpot symbol is decided as the 5R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is specified based on the second special lottery result among the jackpots, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol ("1" , "3", "5", "7" odd number of identical decorative symbols. 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, and 7R probability variation jackpot symbol) When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the odd number of the same decorative symbol combinations of "1", "3", "5", and "7" as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. It is not possible to distinguish any of the specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot, the specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot, the specific 4 6R probability variation jackpot, the specific 5 7R probability variation jackpot, and the specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot from the design, but the second big hit. It can be determined that the winning opening 2006 is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing is completed.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is specified as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the first special lottery result of the jackpot from the received determination result notification command. When the 8R probability variation jackpot is specified, it is decided to be the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of the same even number of decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6"), and among the jackpots, the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot When is specified, it is determined to be an 8R normal jackpot symbol (a combination of even-numbered identical decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6". It is common with the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol), and is specified from the variation pattern command. When the variation time elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of even numbers of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6" as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is specified from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 6 It is not possible to discriminate between the 8R probability variation jackpot and the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot, and it is determined whether or not to control the first jackpot 2005 to a high probability state after the jackpot game that controls opening and closing is completed. Can't.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. 2R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols among the out-of-order symbols (separate stitches). Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357") is determined, and when a small hit is specified, It is determined to be a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols among the missed symbols (bare stitch). It is common with the 2R probability variation big hit symbol), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (end of the game production) At the time), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is either a 2R probability variable big hit or a small hit of the specific 1 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is not determined, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state even after the end of the 2R jackpot game (2R jackpot game in a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter) using the first big winning opening 2005. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the game is produced, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these jackpot games.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If the design (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorative symbols are the same) is determined and the deviation is specified, the missing symbol (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorations) is not accompanied by reach. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 154. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step). S142), if the small hit flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. If (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S146), and neither the big hit flag, the small hit flag, nor the reach flag is set, That is, in the case of a normal deviation (a deviation without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes the content of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol after starting the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol). It also includes information indicating the fluctuation time until the fluctuation display of (in this case, the first special symbol) is stopped. By receiving the variation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changes in the content of the game effect and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting the display The fluctuation time until the display is stopped is specified. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control can be performed by the first special symbol display (variation display of the first special symbol in) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variation display of decorative symbols in) for the fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Will be done.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the above fluctuation. It is stored in a form associated with each random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, similarly to the above-mentioned pre-judgment table, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the variable random number is determined. It is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers match the judgment value (0-163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectations. Consistent with the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the above is executed, and the judgment value (223-240) indicating that 18 kinds of variable random numbers execute one of the super reach effects with high expectation of big hit As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with each other. It should be noted that the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, then, as the process of step S151, the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) after the big hit game. It is determined whether or not the counter value is "0". As described above, in this example, when the result of the second special lottery is a non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot and the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first) after the end of the 2R jackpot game. The time is controlled until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times), and the first special lottery result is non-specified 2 8R normal. If it is a big hit and the time saving control is executed at the time of winning, the time saving control is performed until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R jackpot game. To do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot is terminated in the jackpot control process, the number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) according to the result of the second special lottery is set in the fluctuation number counter. Then, when the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot is terminated, "72" times are set in the fluctuation number counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game. Then, if this counter value is not "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation count counter is not executed after the big hit game, the fluctuation count counter is counted down (1 subtraction) (step S152). , It is further determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is "0" (step S153). As a result, if the counter value is "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that is set (step S154). ..

When the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is determined to be "0" in the process of step S151, that is, the fluctuation of the number of times already set in the fluctuation counter after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. When the display is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, that is, the fluctuation count counter is still set after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. If the variable display of the number of times is not executed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that time. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated. In addition, when the time saving control is executed from the end of the big hit game caused by the big hits of the specific 1 to the specific 8 until the next big hit, the fluctuation number counter is set to "0" in the big hit control process, while "0" is set. By setting the time saving flag, the time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 155, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 157, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executed the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter when the end flag was set, that is, after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. Occasionally (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the time saving flag is reset if the time saving flag is set (step S185). ). As a result, the low-probability non-time saving state (normal state) control is executed after the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. ..

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a jackpot running flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set, the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the time saving flag is reset if the time saving flag is set. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S190), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is a type of jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot. , 16R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) are prepared individually. In step S187, depending on the type of jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot) Big hit start command (2R probability change big hit start command, 4R probability change big hit start command, 5R probability change big hit start command, 6R probability change big hit start command, 7R probability change big hit start command, 8R probability change big hit start command, 10R probability change big hit start command, 16R probability change big hit start command Set the start command, 2R normal jackpot start command, 8R normal jackpot start command). As a result, the production of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game (step S192). The waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. At the time of updating (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the production of the small hit game instructed by the small hit start command is the main liquid crystal. It is executed by a display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker 921, and the like.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 157, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2 ms steady processing, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady processing, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady-state processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady-state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)). The control process related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like is executed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is serialized for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting the drive signal from the I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5. The door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration exciter 242 provided on the door frame 3 or the lower right drive motor 272 of the door. Door-side drive light emission data composed of drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is used for the liquid crystal control unit. Processing such as transmission from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a notice of a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a notice of a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) used for the lottery process related to the monochrome notice effect described later). The process of updating the value of the random number counter or the like that generates the judgment random number) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady-state processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady state process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[10. Monochrome notice production]
In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is executed based on the reservation until the number of reservations based on the predetermination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted. Each time, a monochrome notice effect is executed to see if the notice effect that appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes from color to monochrome (black and white), and before the final hold is exhausted. , When the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the final hold is executed, The effect of entering the black-and-white mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a monochrome advance notice execution process executed on the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 160 is an area occupancy pattern determination table used for determining an area occupancy pattern in executing a monochrome advance notice effect. FIG. 161 is an example showing an area in which the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in executing the monochrome advance notice effect. FIGS. 162 and 163 are production examples when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 159, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, until the number of holds based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted. During the period, it is decided whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect over the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), and if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the result of the monochrome advance notice effect. Controls to determine whether or not to enter the black and white mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (the start condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Step S1300). When it is determined in step S1300 that the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice execution flag described later is set (step S1301). Then, when it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (YES), all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are "normal" except for the hold based on the new prize. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is "variation" (step S1302). When it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command has not been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), or when it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag has not been set (NO), The process proceeds to step S1308.

It should be noted that, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, based on the winning. Preliminary judgment information on hold (whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect will be performed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is possible to specify whether to execute or the mode type of the game effect to be executed), and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-judgment command, until the hold based on the winning is exhausted. The pre-determination information specified from the pre-determination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is specified that the pre-judgment information is classified as "out of place", the fluctuation pattern executed on hold does not form a reach as a variation display of the decorative pattern (reach effect is executed). (Without doing), it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" that is set to stop and display the lost symbol, and as pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to " When it is specified that it is classified into any of "reach 4", the variation pattern executed on hold forms a reach as a variation display of the decorative symbol, and then the reach effect is executed, and the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol) It can be specified that the variation pattern of the "reach variation" is set to stop and display the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12") or the lost symbol ("reach 1" to "reach 4"). Then, in step S1302, by specifying the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the preliminary determination information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, all the fluctuation patterns already reserved are "normal fluctuations". It is designed to determine whether it is a fluctuation pattern of.

Further, when it is determined in step S1302 that all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are the fluctuation patterns of "normal fluctuation" except for the hold based on the new prize (YES), the preliminary determination is made. A monochrome advance notice determination table (not shown) to be used for determining whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect until the number of holds based on the command is exhausted is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome advance notice determination table is compared with the monochrome advance notice determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and it is determined whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect (step S1304). Specifically, if the monochrome advance notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome advance notice determination table, it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed (YES in step S1304), and if they do not match, it is determined. , It is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not executed (NO in step S1304). In the monochrome notice judgment table, the monochrome notice effect is produced according to whether the fluctuation pattern for holding based on the new prize is the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" or the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation". In the case of the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of determining that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher than in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". Is set to. However, in the monochrome notice judgment table, whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the hold based on the new prize is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. It may be set so that the determination is made so that the probability of determining that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher in the case of a big hit (or a small hit) than in the case of a loss.

Further, when it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES), one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns is used as a table according to the number of holds specified from the pre-determination command. The area occupancy pattern determination table (FIG. 160) used for determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupancy pattern, each time the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is executed during the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect appears in any area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is set whether or not to change the notice effect that has appeared from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupancy pattern determination table selected in response to the hold number command is compared with the area occupancy pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of the area occupancy pattern is determined (step S1306). When it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed, the monochrome advance notice execution flag indicating that the monochrome advance notice effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

On the other hand, except for the hold based on the new prize in step S1302, any of the fluctuation patterns for the amount already held is not the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (the "reach fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is included. If it is determined (NO), or if it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome advance notice effect is not executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome advance notice effect. As described above, except for the hold based on the new prize in step S1302, only when it is determined that all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are the fluctuation patterns of "normal fluctuation", the monochrome advance notice effect is produced. By making it possible to execute, even the reach is not formed in the variation display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern of "normal variation", and it is not possible to raise the expectation of a big hit, but such "normal variation" By executing the monochrome advance notice effect for the fluctuation pattern of "", there is a possibility of entering the black-and-white mode described later, and it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode, and the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" is repeated. It is possible to eliminate the boringness caused by being used.

The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is an area of any one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns as a table according to the number of holds specified from the predetermination command. This is a table used to determine the occupancy pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160A, as an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 1, the area occupancy patterns 1 to 1 As shown in FIG. 160 (B), as an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when a table in which 4 is set is provided and a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 2. FIG. 160 (C) shows an area occupancy pattern determination table used when a table in which area occupancy patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided and a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 3. As shown in the above, a table in which the area occupancy patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

In addition, the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table is displayed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is executed during the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is set in which area of the area the notice effect is to appear, and whether or not to change the appearing notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (A), a notice effect is given to each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while one hold already held is exhausted. In the area occupancy pattern determination table set to appear and shown in FIG. 160 (B), each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is notified while the two already held holds are exhausted. The effect is set to appear stepwise, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed while the three already held holds are exhausted. The notice effect is set to appear in each area in stages.

In addition, when deciding the area occupancy pattern, about the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect (the hold that decided to execute the monochrome notice effect when the hold is added based on a new prize) The area occupancy pattern that can be determined from the area occupancy pattern determination table differs depending on whether the variation pattern of is a "normal variation" variation pattern or a "reach variation" variation pattern. It has become. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (A), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the variation of "reach variation". When it is a pattern, one of the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4 is determined. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the variation pattern is "reach variation". In this case, any of the area occupancy patterns 11 to 18 is determined. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the variation pattern is "reach variation". In this case, any of the area occupancy patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern, the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is not exhausted. In addition, although the advance notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect is applied to a part or all of the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a point is given to the advance notice effect). By preventing the effect of stick sticking) from being executed and not changing part or all of the notice effect that appeared from color to monochrome (black and white), part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. I try not to be occupied by the notice production of. In other words, by executing the black-and-white advance notice production, it is expected that the black-and-white mode will be entered, but the black-and-white mode is not actually entered.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the main is before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted. A notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick sticks to the notice effect) is executed for all of the notice effects that have appeared. Taking this as an opportunity, by changing all of the notice effects that have appeared from color to monochrome (black and white), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effects, and black and white. I am trying to enter the mode. In other words, by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when entering the monochrome mode, a reach is always formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of a big hit can be raised. It has become. Further, when a specific effect is executed for all of the notice effects appearing in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is always a monochrome notice effect. Since it is occupied by and always enters the black-and-white mode, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed when a notice effect appears. On the other hand, when the black-and-white advance notice effect is executed, the black-and-white mode is not entered, and reach is not formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern that is not in the black-and-white mode (without executing the reach effect). It is not possible to raise expectations for a big hit. That is, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the expectation for a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and when the black-and-white mode is not entered, the expectation for a big hit (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that it is a state that suggests. Further, in the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect appears stepwise in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but by changing the notice effect to appear from color to monochrome (black and white). , The monochrome advance notice effect gradually occupies the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the wider the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the more the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 becomes. Since it approaches the state of being occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the monochrome mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect that appears is displayed in color. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it becomes possible for the monochrome advance notice effect to occupy the wide area, and when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the wide area, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Since the entire display area of is approaching the state of being occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the monochrome mode.

In addition, the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table is displayed on the main liquid crystal display when some of the pending reservations are exhausted, except for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. There is an area occupancy pattern that is set so that the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the device 1600. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11 and 12, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), the area occupancy patterns 1 to 10 , 23 to 30, even if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the first hold already held is exhausted. It is set so that a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the hold that has already been held from the next time onward is exhausted. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), the area occupancy patterns 3, 4, 17 to 22 are already present. Before the last hold held is exhausted, a notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the last hold already held is exhausted. , The notice effect is set not to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to know when the monochrome advance notice effect will start and when it will end for the hold that has already been put on hold, so it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the monochrome advance notice effect will always be executed. You can do it.

By the way, in the area occupancy pattern, the area in which the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 161, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the upper part of the display area is the area A, the left side of the display area is the area B, the lower part of the display area is the area C, and the display area. The right side of is set to the area D. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided, but it does not have to be equally divided, and a part or all of the areas where the notice effect appears are set to overlap each other. You may be.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the hold from the next time onward that has already been held is exhausted. At that time, a new notice effect is set to appear in an area different from a part of the area where the notice effect has already appeared. Then, until the advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new advance notice effect is set to appear stepwise in the area not occupied by the advance notice effect. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), in the area occupancy pattern 31, after the advance notice effect appears in the area C, when the second hold already held is exhausted, the area A notice effect appears in an area D different from C, and when a third hold already held is exhausted, a notice effect appears in areas A and B different from areas C and D. I am doing it. As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, since a new notice effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the notice effect, it is easy to recognize the new notice effect, and a plurality of the new notice effects are easily recognized. Even if various types of notice effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for players to overlook any of the notice effects. Further, until the advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new advance notice effect can be gradually appeared in the area not occupied by the advance notice effect. As long as there is an area not occupied by the notice effect, whether or not a new notice effect will appear (a specific effect for the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a dot stick is pierced for the notice effect). By changing the notice effect that appeared from color to monochrome (black and white) with the execution of the effect), the area where the notice effect appeared is occupied by the monochrome notice effect). It is designed to attract attention.

In addition, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the hold from the next time onward that has already been held is exhausted. At that time, the advance notice effect may be set to appear so as to include a part of the area where the advance notice effect has already appeared. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), in the area occupancy patterns 37 to 39, after the advance notice effect appears in any of the areas B, C, and D, the third area is already reserved. When the hold is exhausted, the advance notice effect appears on the entire screen of the display area so that the areas B, C, and D are included.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect (this example) is given to the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear. In, an area occupancy pattern (for example, the area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A) is set in which the effect of the point bar sticking to the entire screen (background image) is executed. .. In such an area occupancy pattern, the advance notice effect does not appear for the areas A, B, C, and D, and the background image is displayed in the entire display area, but the displayed background image On the other hand, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick sticks into the background image), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by the monochrome background image. ing. Then, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the black and white mode is entered as in the case where the display area is occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect. For this reason, if the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation that it will be a big hit cannot be raised, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed. , You can raise the expectation of entering the black and white mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed for the notice effect that appears (for example, the area in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A). Compared to the occupancy pattern 4), the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect is executed for the full screen (background image) in which the notice effect does not appear. As an opportunity, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by a monochrome background image (for example, the area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A) is executed. The probability is low, but the probability of a big hit after entering the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear is compared with the case of the loss. Therefore, the probability of determining the area occupancy pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. Therefore, even if the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, there is a probability that a big hit will occur if the specific effect is executed (when the black and white mode is entered). It is possible to maintain high and big hit expectations.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, an area occupancy pattern in which a notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the area occupancy shown in FIG. 160A). The area occupancy pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In the area occupancy pattern in which the notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear in the areas A, B, C, and D. However, even though it is a variable display of the decorative pattern once, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick sticks to the advance notice effect) for all of the notice effects that have appeared. The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by a monochrome advance notice effect. When one notice effect appears for the areas A, B, C, and D (full screen) of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the areas A, B, C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , D (full screen) has a higher probability of being a big hit after entering the black and white mode than when multiple notice effects appear, further increasing the expectation of being a big hit when entering the black and white mode. Can be done.

Next, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process, step S1306 is performed every time the start condition for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted. The type of advance notice effect to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupancy pattern of the monochrome advance notice effect is determined, and the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. When it is occupied by the notice effect, the control is performed to enter the monochrome mode as a result of the monochrome advance effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) (step S1308). When it is determined in step S1308 that the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (step S1309). If the fluctuation start command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), or if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome advance notice execution process ends.

Further, when the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the fluctuation from the main control board 1310 is based on the fact that the start condition for the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is satisfied. By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is before the digestion (NO), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern determined in step S1306. Of the display areas, the area corresponding to the remaining number of holds until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is determined as the area where the notice effect appears, and the type of the notice effect to appear in that area is Select a notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) used to determine the set advance notice effect pattern. In this advance notice effect pattern, a single or a plurality of types of advance notice effect are set so that the area determined as the area occupancy pattern can be occupied. Then, the advance notice effect pattern determination table is selected based on the area determined as the area occupancy pattern and the type of the variable pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, and the selected advance notice effect pattern determination table is selected. And the random number for determining the advance notice effect pattern read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 are compared with each other to determine the type of advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) for occupying the area determined as the area occupancy pattern (step S1311). Here, before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted, the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that the decoration is performed based on the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". The variable display of the symbol is executed, and during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the type of the advance notice effect determined in step S1311 appears in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The production is executed as follows (step S1312).

The notice effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the advance notice effect pattern in which the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area is set as a table corresponding to the area determined as the area occupancy pattern. It is a table used to determine. Specifically, as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area A is set. As a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set is provided. As a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area C in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area C is set is provided. As a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area D is set is provided. ing.

Further, when the advance notice effect appears over a plurality of areas such as the area A and the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the advance notice effect that can occupy both the area A and the area B can be occupied. Further, a notice effect pattern determination table in which a combination of a notice effect capable of occupying the area A and a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is provided is provided. That is, the advance notice effect at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect may occupy the area determined as the area occupancy pattern, and may be a advance notice effect that appears over a plurality of areas or a combination of a plurality of advance notice effects. There may be.

Here, the notice effect that can be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of executing the monochrome notice effect is similarly displayed on the main liquid crystal display other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed. It is possible to make it appear in a part or all of the display area of the device 1600. In this way, it is decided whether to execute each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not the hit is a big hit and whether or not to execute the reach effect, except when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, depending on the type of notice production, there are a notice production with a high expectation of a big hit and a notice production with a low expectation of a big hit, and when a notice production with a high expectation of a big hit appears, a big hit You will be able to raise your expectations.

Then, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the advance notice with a low expectation that becomes a big hit other than when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed. I try to decide the production with high probability. As a result, even if a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit appears except when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit cannot be raised, but a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit appears. Later, when the notice effect that appeared changed from color to monochrome (black and white), it can be determined that it is being executed as part of the monochrome notice effect, not just the advance notice effect, and it is expected to be a big hit. Even if a low notice effect appears, it is possible to raise the expectation that the monochrome notice effect will be executed.

Further, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is changed. Depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of determining a highly expected notice production that will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed is different. I have to. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the "reach variation" variation pattern, the monochrome advance notice effect is executed more than when it is the "normal variation" variation pattern. We are trying to determine with a high probability a highly expected notice production that will be a big hit other than the time. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the black-and-white mode is entered, so that the expectation is a big hit. When the notice effect that has appeared changes from color to monochrome (black and white) after the appearance of a high notice effect, the probability of entering the black and white mode increases as a result of the monochrome notice effect, and the expectation of entering the black and white mode is expected. You will be able to increase it.

Further, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the variation pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is ". Among the fluctuation patterns of "reach fluctuation", monochrome depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit or a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a low expectation of a big hit. The probability of determining a notice production with a high degree of expectation, which is a big hit except when the notice effect is executed, is different. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is the fluctuation pattern of the “reach fluctuation” that executes the highly expected reach production that is a big hit (for example,). As pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4", "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit 7", "big hit 8", "big hit 11", When it is specified that it is classified into any of "big hit 12", "reach 3", and "reach 4"), when it is a variation pattern that executes a reach effect with a low expectation of becoming a big hit ( For example, as pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4", "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5", "big hit 6", "big hit 9" , "Big hit 10", "Reach 1", and "Reach 2"), the expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed is higher. The notice production is decided with high probability. For this reason, when the notice effect with high expectation of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and enters the black and white mode, the notice effect with high expectation of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white). The probability of executing a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit during execution of the black-and-white mode is higher than when the black-and-white mode is entered due to the change, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

At the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the lottery result regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a big hit. It may be decided according to whether it is a big hit or a loss, and depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, a notice production with a high expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed The probability of determining is different. Specifically, when the lottery result for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a big hit, the notice effect with a high expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed is higher than when it is lost. May be determined with a high probability. Even in such a case, if the notice effect with high expectation of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and enters the black and white mode, the notice effect with high expectation of a big hit will change from color to monochrome. By changing to (black and white), the probability of a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when the black and white mode is entered, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

Further, when executing the monochrome advance notice effect, the step-up advance notice effect can also be used as the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311. The step-up notice effect is to provide an effect image corresponding to each of the multiple stages, and from the first stage of the multiple stages based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not it will be a big hit and whether or not to execute the reach effect. This is an effect in which the effect images corresponding to a predetermined stage appear in sequence. Further, in the step-up notice effect, the higher the predetermined stage is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Then, among the plurality of stages, each of the effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed on the main liquid crystal display, for example. Of the display area of the device 1600, the area A, the area B, the area C, and the area D are made to appear, and as the step-up notice effect stage progresses, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the notice effect. I am trying to increase the area.

When the above step-up notice effect is used, the effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the fourth stage are supported among the plurality of stages. For example, each of the produced effect images is made to appear in the areas A, A, B, A, B, C, and A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and stepped up. When the stage of the advance notice effect progresses, the area occupied by the advance notice effect increases in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by displaying the effect image in an area larger than the area before the stage progresses. It may be. Further, when the first stage of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image appears in the area A in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the second stage is performed, the area A to the area B When the effect image is enlarged and progressed to the third stage, the effect image is enlarged from the areas A and B to the area C, and when the effect image is advanced to the fourth stage, the effect image is expanded to the areas A, B, C and D. By enlarging the area in which the effect image of the advance notice effect is displayed when the stage of the step advance notice effect is advanced, the area occupied by the advance notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 increases. You may try to do it. Further, when the area occupied by the advance notice effect does not increase in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 even though the step-up advance notice effect stage has progressed, the step is increased by increasing the probability of a big hit. It is possible to pay attention not only to whether or not the stage of the advance notice production progresses, but also whether or not the area occupied by the advance notice effect increases.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted (YES), the main is performed before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted. When the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the effect of entering the black-and-white mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed, while the effect is executed. , If a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect (it was a mess of the monochrome advance notice effect), the main liquid crystal display device does not enter the black and white mode. The background image in the display area of 1600 is set to color, and the effect of maintaining the background image in the normal state is executed (step S1313). Further, when it is determined that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted, the monochrome advance notice execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

As described above, when the black-and-white mode is entered at the time of the hold digestion that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome and the black-and-white mode is entered. If not, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set as the color as in the background image in the normal state (other than the black and white mode), and the number of colors of the background image is different. In this way, when the black-and-white mode is entered by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, a reach is always formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the black-and-white mode, and the reach effect is executed, which is a big hit. Although it is possible to raise expectations, the background image becomes monochrome and the number of colors in the background image is smaller than in normal times, which gives the player an impression different from normal times, which is a big hit. Expectations can be raised in combination with expectations. In addition, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the background image becomes monochrome, whereas on the front of the background image, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or after the black-and-white mode is entered, as in the normal case. By displaying the images of the notice effect that can be used in color, the images related to the lottery results can be made to stand out in comparison with the background image. That is, when the black-and-white mode is entered, by making it easier for the player to recognize the images related to the lottery results, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the image of the notice effect are displayed when the image of the notice effect appears. On the other hand, it is possible to draw more attention to the player than usual. On the other hand, when the black-and-white mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as the variable display of the decorative pattern (without executing the reach effect), and the expectation of becoming a big hit cannot be raised. For this reason, if the black-and-white mode is not entered, the variable display of the decorative pattern cannot be expected, and since the probability that the image of the advance notice effect appears is low, the advance notice effect cannot be expected, but the background image is Since it becomes color and the number of colors of the background image is larger than that in the black and white mode, it is possible to give a lively impression to the player even if the image of the notice production does not appear, and there is no expectation that it will be a big hit. It can be mitigated.

A specific example of the monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In FIGS. 162 and 163, the fluctuation pattern of the hold (hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) added based on the new prize when the number of holds is 2, is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. (Classified into any of "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as pre-judgment information), and the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold shown in FIG. 160 (B) is displayed. The case where the area occupancy pattern 15 is determined is shown. In the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock of hold, while the first hold already held is exhausted, a notice effect is given to areas A and B of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is set to appear, and while the second hold that has already been held is exhausted, the notice effect is set to appear in areas C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is.

First, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), when a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 2, the first hold already held is exhausted. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at the time of holding 2. A notice production that straddles A and B appears. Specifically, as a preliminary announcement effect that straddles areas A and B, a person playing mahjong throws away the mahjong tiles and shouts "How about this!". At this time, during the execution of the advance notice effect straddling the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the effect (specific effect) in which the mahjong stick sticks into the appearing advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, the monochrome advance notice effect continues to occupy the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of "153"). With regard to the variable display of the decorative pattern, by maintaining the hue of the color, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (E), the characters "black and white chance!" Are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 before the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is displayed in a small and lightly shaded manner, and mahjong dots appear on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the advance notice effect that straddles the areas A and B is mere. It is possible to recognize that the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect has started, not the advance notice effect (notice effect other than the monochrome advance notice effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (F), the next hold (the second hold already held when the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is added) is digested. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, the mahjong dots appearing on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are scattered outside the display area. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 162 (G), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at the time of holding 2. A notice production that straddles C and D appears. Specifically, as a preliminary announcement effect that straddles the areas C and D, an effect that a person playing mahjong shouts "I can win!" While looking at the mahjong tiles is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 162 (H), during the execution of the advance notice effect straddling the areas C and D, the effect (specific effect) in which the mahjong stick sticks into the appearing advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, not only the areas A and B but also the areas C and D are occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, so that the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied. The area will be occupied by the monochrome preview effect. In addition, in the case of the monochrome notice effect, a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not pierced by the notice effect appearing across the areas C and D. Is not occupied by the monochrome preview effect, so it does not enter the monochrome mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), the characters "black and white mode standby" are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the black and white mode is entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect. It can be recognized that this is foretold. Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). After that, before the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (K), the characters "monochrome mode entry" are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By displaying in a large and darkened mode, it is possible to clearly recognize that the black-and-white mode will be entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect in the next variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (L), when the next hold (hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It will start again. At this time, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the background image becomes monochrome by entering the black-and-white mode, giving an impression different from the color which is the background image in the normal time other than the black-and-white mode. It is fueling the expectations of others. Then, when the black-and-white mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 163 (M), the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of the “reach fluctuation”. Since a reach (in this example, the symbol "7") is formed as a variable display of the decorative symbol and then the reach effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit can be raised. If the lottery result is a big hit, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of "7"), and if the lottery result is a loss, the variation of the decorative symbol. The display will be stopped at a lost symbol (in this example, a medium symbol other than "7").

Before and after the mahjong stick sticks to the notice effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). ), And there is no change in the image itself such as the character depicted as a preview effect. The data that specifies the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the data that specifies the color arrangement of the depiction are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, but in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, Data for designating the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be commonly used, and it is possible to prevent the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 from increasing.

In addition, when a mahjong dot stick pierces a notice effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the area is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the main The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be shown. For example, when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600). By displaying "50%" as the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect and the ratio of the remaining area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect. Can be clearly recognized. Further, when displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome advance notice effect occupies a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It may be displayed in advance before the display, and in such a case, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can also be noticed, and the player can take the process until the monochrome advance notice effect occupies. Can be visually recognized with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect is the target of the black-and-white mode, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode is completed. , The black-and-white mode is also terminated, but not only the variable display of the decorative symbol that entered the black-and-white mode, but also the black-and-white mode is continued over the variable display of the decorative symbol multiple times after entering the black-and-white mode. You may. For example, even if the hold is interrupted, the black-and-white mode may be continued until a plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In this way, when the black-and-white mode is continued over the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times after entering the black-and-white mode, even if a big hit is not obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode. By continuing the black-and-white mode even in the variable display of the decorative pattern from the next time onward, it is possible to maintain the expectation that it will be a big hit.

In the above explanation, when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the monochrome mode is entered from the start of the next variable display of the decorative symbol. Not limited. For example, the monochrome advance notice effect is executed in the variable display of a single or multiple decorative symbols, and the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, that is, the monochrome advance notice effect. Monochrome by entering the black-and-white mode within the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of occupancy, and forming a reach (performing the reach effect) within the variable display of the decorative symbol when entering the black-and-white mode. It is possible to raise the expectation that it will be a big hit even for the variable display of the decorative pattern at the time when the notice effect of is occupied. Further, for example, among the advance notice effects that can appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation of a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( When a specific high-expectation notice effect displayed on the full screen) appears and a mahjong dot stick sticks to the specific high-expectation notice effect, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. By occupying the black-and-white advance notice effect, the player can enter the black-and-white mode, so that the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode can be increased even when the hold is not stored.

[11. Hold notice production]
In the present embodiment, regarding the hold based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310, after the hold is added, the change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) based on the digestion of the hold is executed. Is displayed as a hold display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the display, but the mode of the hold display changes every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is executed during that period. By executing the hold notice effect that makes it possible, and by the mode of the final hold display displayed at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the digestion of the hold, the decorative symbol The effect of showing the expected degree of jackpot for the variable display (variable display of special symbols) is being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, not only during the standby of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but also after the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been waiting is started, the display continues as a hold display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is displayed, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 continuously displays the number of holdings (the number of holdings) that are waiting for the variable display of the decorative symbol and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. As the hold display to be displayed, the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold display at the time of execution are displayed respectively. This hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 170. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a hold notice execution process executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 165 is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern in executing the hold notice effect. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an aspect change effect execution process executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 167 is an example of the mode change effect determination table used for determining the mode change effect pattern in the execution of the mode change effect. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the mode change suggestion effect execution process executed on the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect execution process executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 170 is an example of a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect pattern determination table used to determine a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect pattern in executing a pseudo-continuously fluctuating effect.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the hold notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, a hold is added based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the hold is held. It is decided whether or not to execute the hold notice effect for the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) based on the digestion is completed. Control to do. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (the start condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Step S1401). If it is determined in step S1401 that the pre-determination command has not been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), the process proceeds to step S1409 without adding the hold display to the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If it is determined in step S1401 that the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), whether or not the monochrome advance notice effect is being executed because the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set, or. , It is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed because the hold notice execution flag described later is set (step S1402). Then, when it is determined in step S1402 that the monochrome notice effect or the hold notice effect is being executed (YES), the hold display is added to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (step S1408), but the hold display is Goes to step S1409 without executing the hold notice effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is not simultaneously executed for two or more hold displays among the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is used. Even when the hold notice effect is being executed for the hold display that is already displayed, it may be possible to execute the hold notice effect for the newly added hold display. However, for any one of the two or more hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, any one of the mode change effect, the mode change suggestion effect, and the pseudo continuous change effect, which will be described later, is produced. When the above is executed, none of the mode change effect, the mode change suggestion effect, and the pseudo continuous change time effect is executed for the hold display excluding the one hold display. As a result, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the mode change effect, the mode change suggestion effect, and the pseudo continuous change time effect are not simultaneously executed for two or more hold displays, and the effects are mixed. It is preventing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that neither the monochrome notice effect nor the hold notice effect is being executed (NO), the hold used to determine whether to execute the hold notice effect for the hold display. After selecting the advance notice determination table (not shown), the selected hold advance notice determination table is compared with the hold advance notice determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the hold advance notice effect. (Step S1403). Specifically, if the hold notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the hold notice determination table, it is determined that the hold notice effect is executed (YES in step S1403), and if they do not match, it is determined. , It is determined that the hold notice effect is not executed (NO in step S1403). In the hold notice determination table, whether or not to execute the hold notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the hold based on the pre-judgment command is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. It is set so that the determination is made so that the probability of determining that the hold notice effect is executed is higher in the case of a big hit (or a small hit) than in the case of a loss.

If it is determined in step S1403 that the hold notice is to be executed (YES), the hold notice determination table corresponding to the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310, that is, the number of holds (hold) specified from the pre-determination command. After selecting the hold notice determination table (step S1404) corresponding to the pre-judgment information (loss, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12, reach 1 to reach 4), the selected hold notice determination table and the peripheral control board 1510 The type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined by comparing with the hold notice determination random number read from the RAM (step S1405). Then, the hold notice execution flag indicating that the hold notice effect is being executed is set, the type of the hold notice pattern determined in step S1405 is set, and the main liquid crystal display is performed in the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern. A hold display is added to and displayed on the device 1600 (step S1407). The hold notice execution flag and the type of the hold notice pattern are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, but are based on the end of the hold notice effect, that is, the digestion of the hold that is the execution target of the hold notice effect. It is reset when the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1403 that the hold notice is not executed (NO), the hold display is added to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (step S1408), but the hold notice effect is executed for the hold display. Without any problem, the process proceeds to step S1409. When the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold display, the hold display is displayed in white (basic color) as a mode of the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The hold notice determination table shown in FIG. 165 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and when the hold notice effect is executed for the hold display, each prior determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310, that is, This is a table used to determine the type of hold notice pattern for each hold number (holding memory number) and advance determination information (loss, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12, reach 1 to reach 4). Specifically, as a hold notice determination table to be used when hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), a table corresponding to each prior determination information is provided as shown in FIG. 165 (A), and hold 2 is lit (hold 2 is lit (). As a hold notice determination table used for the hold number = 2), a table corresponding to each prior judgment information is provided as shown in FIG. 165 (B), and the hold notice to be used when the hold 3 is lit (hold number = 3). As a determination table, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), a table corresponding to each pre-judgment information is provided, and as a hold notice determination table to be used when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), FIG. 165 (D) shows. As shown, a table corresponding to each pre-judgment information is provided.

Here, it corresponds to the hold notice determination table corresponding to the pre-judgment command, that is, the number of holds (number of hold storages) and the pre-judgment information (loss, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12, reach 1 to reach 4) specified from the prior judgment command. A plurality of types of hold notice patterns set in the hold notice determination table will be described. These hold notice patterns are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is executed (every time the hold is exhausted) during the execution of the hold notice effect. It is set how the mode of the hold display to be displayed changes. Further, in the present embodiment, not only before the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is digested, but also when the hold is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the digestion is executed. Even inside, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is designed to continuously display the hold display. Therefore, in the hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), the decorative symbol is displayed until the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the digestion of the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is completed. Since the variable display of is started once, the hold notice pattern in which the mode of the hold display is set for two times is associated so as to enable the mode of the hold display to be changed once, and when the hold 2 is lit. In the hold notice determination table used for (number of holds = 2), the change display of the decorative symbol starts twice until the change display of the decorative symbol based on the digestion of the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is completed. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the mode of the hold display for three times is set so as to enable the mode of the hold display to be changed twice is associated, and when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3). In the hold notice determination table to be used, since the change display of the decorative symbol based on the digestion of the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is started three times before the end of the change display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is displayed. A hold notice pattern in which the hold display mode for four times is set so as to enable the mode to change three times is associated with the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4). Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is started four times before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the digestion of the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is completed, the mode of the hold display changes four times. The hold notice pattern in which the mode of the hold display for 5 times is set so as to make it possible is stored in a form associated with the hold notice pattern.

In addition, as the hold display modes set in the hold notice pattern, five modes are prepared so that the hold display is displayed in any of white (basic color), blue, green, red, and ladybug pattern. ing. Then, when determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the mode of the hold display changing to the end, the jackpot expectation is increased in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Is set to. That is, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit (big hit 1 to 12 big hits) as the pre-judgment information, the final hold display mode is a mode with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red or ladybug pattern). Is determined with a high probability, and when the lottery result is specified as a loss (loss, reach 1 to reach 4) as the preliminary judgment information, the final hold display mode is a mode with a low jackpot expectation (for example, blue). By determining the hold notice pattern with a high probability, when a mode having a high jackpot expectation is displayed as the final hold display mode, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

The hold notice pattern is set so that the mode of hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease). , Each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is executed (every time the hold is exhausted), the mode of the hold display is maintained, or the mode with high expectation of big hit is set. Has been done. Therefore, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode with a low expectation of a big hit, the mode of the hold display is a big hit until the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the digestion of the hold, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is completed. There is still a possibility that it will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the hold display with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the hold display mode in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern after displaying the hold display mode in white (basic color), and start from an intermediate mode (for example,). Suddenly starts in red due to hold notice pattern number 5 when hold 1 is lit), and changes to the next mode without going through an intermediate mode (for example, from white to ladybug due to hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 1 is lit). It is also set to change to a ladybug pattern). Therefore, even if the chance of changing the mode of the hold display (the number of holds) is small, it is possible to display the mode of the hold display in a mode with a high expectation of a big hit. In addition, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode with a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which mode the next mode will change to, and the mode of the hold display is expected to the end. It can be noticed.

In addition, in the hold notice determination table, only when the jackpots 1 to 8 are specified as the advance judgment information from the hold number command, the hold notice pattern (hold when hold 1 is lit) becomes a ladybug pattern as the final hold display mode. Determine the notice pattern numbers 6 and 7, the hold notice pattern numbers 8 to 11 when the hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern numbers 11 to 15 when the hold 3 is lit, and the hold notice pattern numbers 11 to 15 when the hold 4 is lit. Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the mode of the hold display is displayed with a ladybug pattern, the lottery result is either a specific 2 to 8 big hit or a non-specific 2 big hit at the time of digestion of the hold display, and among the big hit games Execute a big hit game that can win many prize balls (for example, a 4R to 16R big hit game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in a manner in which a game ball can enter). It has been confirmed that this will be done, and the expectations of players for big hit games are increasing.

In addition, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, even if the hold notice effect is executed for the hold display, it is always displayed in blue as the final hold display mode. When the hold notice pattern to be held (hold notice pattern number 1 when the hold 1 to 4 is lit) is determined, while the jackpot 1 to 12 or reach 1 to 4 is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the final As a mode of hold display, it is possible to determine a hold notice pattern other than the hold notice pattern displayed in blue. For this reason, when the mode of the hold display is displayed in any of the green, red, and ladybug pattern modes, it is confirmed that the reach is at least reached when the hold display is digested, and the reach effect is executed. The degree of expectation of the player for the game is increasing.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, it is more final when the jackpots 5 to 8 are specified than when the jackpots 9 to 12 are specified as the preliminary judgment information from the preliminary determination command, and when the jackpots 1 to 4 are further specified. Hold notice patterns (for example, hold notice pattern numbers 4 to 7 when hold 1 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 5 to 11 when hold 2 is lit, and hold 3 when lit) are modes with high expectation of big hits. The hold notice pattern numbers 7 to 15 and the hold notice pattern numbers 7 to 15) when the hold 4 is lit are set to be determined with a high probability. Therefore, when the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode with high expectation of big hit, when the lottery result becomes a big hit at the time of digesting the hold display, the big hit is 1 to 4 big hits (specific 7, 8). The probability of being a big hit is high, and the probability of executing a big hit game with a large number of rounds (for example, a 10R big hit game with a specific 7 big hit or a 16R big hit game with a specific 8 big hit) is high. , The degree of expectation of the player for the jackpot game is increasing.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, when reach 2, 5 and 8 are specified as prior judgment information from the prior judgment command, reach 3, 6 and 9 are further specified. In the case, the hold notice pattern (for example, hold notice pattern number 4 and 5 when hold 1 is lit, hold notice pattern number 5 and 5 when hold 2 is lit) is a mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher as the final hold display mode. 7. Hold notice pattern numbers 7 to 10 when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 7 to 10 when hold 4 is lit) are set to be determined with high probability. For this reason, when the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode with a high jackpot expectation, a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, a strong SP reach other than a specific one or a specific strong SP) is produced when the hold display is exhausted. The probability of executing reach) is high, and the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increasing.

Next, in the hold notice effect execution process, the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shifted and displayed each time the start condition for the change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is satisfied. Control is performed to determine whether or not to execute any of the mode change effect, the mode change suggestion effect, and the pseudo continuous change time effect for the hold display. Specifically, whether or not the variation pattern command (variation start command) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), that is, hold. Is digested to determine whether or not to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) (step S1409). If the fluctuation pattern command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1409 and it is determined that the hold is not exhausted (NO), the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not shifted. Ends the hold notice effect execution process.

Further, when it is determined in step S1409 that the hold is exhausted by transmitting the fluctuation pattern command (variation start command) from the main control board 1310 (YES), the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command is changed to ". It is determined whether or not "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is included (step S1410). Then, when it is determined in step S1410 that the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command includes "pseudo continuous fluctuation" (YES), the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect execution process (step S1416) described later is executed. After that, the hold notice effect execution process is terminated.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation" means that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has a plurality of decorative symbol rows, even though the game ball is awarded once to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is an effect of varyingly displaying a plurality of decorative symbol rows as if they are variablely displayed over a time, and it is a condition that a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. In addition, the variable display of a plurality of decorative pattern rows is started again. In addition, in the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (temporary stop display), but the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). At that time, as a predetermined decorative symbol of "pseudo continuous fluctuation", a decorative symbol drawn as "pseudo-ream", which does not normally appear, appears. In the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", when the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again, it is a condition that a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, but the condition is not limited to such a condition. , It may be suggested that the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again. Further, on condition that the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the number of times (re-variation number) to start the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows again is set to 1 to 3 times, and the re-variation is performed. When the number of times is one, a plurality of decorative symbol rows are variablely displayed twice, and when the number of re-variations is two, a plurality of decorative symbol rows are variablely displayed three times. When the number of re-variations is three, the plurality of decorative symbol rows are variablely displayed as if the plurality of decorative symbol rows were variablely displayed four times. In addition, after the number of re-variations of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, either the reach effect is executed as the reach or the lost symbol that is not the reach is stopped and displayed. There is.

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, by determining a fluctuation pattern including "pseudo continuous fluctuation" at a higher rate than when losing, a plurality of decorations are displayed again on condition that a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the variable display of the symbol sequence is started, the rate at which the lottery result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) becomes high, and the expectation for the big hit game can be raised. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, when determining a fluctuation pattern that includes "pseudo continuous fluctuation" at a higher rate than when losing, a fluctuation pattern in which a large number of re-variations are set as "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is determined. By doing so, the more the number of re-variations of the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation" is executed, the higher the rate at which the lottery result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation), and the higher the expectation for the big hit game can be raised.

Further, when it is determined in step S1410 that the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command does not include "pseudo continuous fluctuation" (NO), whether or not to execute the mode change effect for the hold display is determined. After selecting the mode change effect determination table (not shown) to be used for determination, the selected mode change effect determination table is compared with the mode change effect determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the hold display is displayed. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not to execute the mode change effect (step S1411). Specifically, when the mode change effect determination random number matches the determination value set in the mode change effect determination table, it is determined that the mode change effect is executed for the hold display (YES in step S1411). If they do not match, it is determined that the mode change effect is not executed for the hold display (NO in step S1411). Then, if it is determined in step S1411 that the mode change effect is to be executed for the hold display (YES), the mode change effect execution process (step S1412) described later is executed, and then the hold notice effect execution process is terminated. In the mode change effect determination table, it depends on whether or not the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, is changing based on the hold notice pattern. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to execute the mode change effect, and if it is determined that the mode of the hold display changes, it is not the timing when the mode of the hold display changes. It is set so that the probability of determining that the mode change effect is executed is higher than the case where it is determined. As a result, when the mode change effect is executed for the hold display, there is a high probability that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit (the probability that the mode change effect is not false) is high. Players' expectations for change effects are increasing.

Further, when it is determined in step S1411 that the mode change effect is not executed for the hold display (NO), the mode change suggestion used to determine whether or not to execute the mode change suggestion effect for the hold display is determined. After selecting the effect judgment table (not shown), the selected mode change suggestion effect judgment table is compared with the mode change suggestion effect judgment random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mode change suggestion is given to the hold display. It is determined whether or not to execute the effect (step S1413). Specifically, when the mode change suggestion effect determination random number matches the determination value set in the mode change suggestion effect determination table, it is determined that the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display (in step S1413). YES), if they do not match, it is determined that the mode change suggestion effect is not executed for the hold display (NO in step S1413). Then, when it is determined in step S1413 that the mode change suggestion effect is to be executed for the hold display (YES), the mode change suggestion effect execution process (step S1414) described later is executed, and then the hold notice effect execution process is terminated. To do. In the mode change suggestion effect determination table, whether or not the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect and is being executed, is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern. Correspondingly, it is determined whether or not to execute the mode change suggestion effect, and if it is determined that the mode of such a hold display changes, the timing of the hold display change It is set so that the probability of determining that the mode change suggestion effect is executed is higher than the case where it is determined not to be. As a result, when the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display, there is a high probability that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit (the probability that the mode change suggestion effect is not false) is high. , The player's expectation for the mode change suggestion effect is increasing.

Further, when it is determined in step S1413 that the mode change suggestion effect is not executed for the hold display (NO), all the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are shifted and displayed (step S1415). .. However, when the hold notice effect is being executed, when the hold display that is the execution target of the hold notice effect is shifted and displayed, it is displayed in the mode of hold display based on the hold notice pattern. , When the hold notice effect is not being executed, the hold display mode is maintained in white (basic color) and displayed when the hold display is shifted and displayed. In addition, when the hold notice effect is being executed and it is determined that the mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the hold notice effect changes, the mode of the hold display is changed and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, does not change, the mode of the hold display is maintained and displayed. In the case where it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, changes based on the hold notice pattern, the mode changes with respect to the hold display as in step S1415. When none of the effect, the mode change suggestion effect, or the pseudo continuous change effect is executed, the mode of the hold display when the hold display is shifted and displayed (at the time of digesting the hold, that is, at the start of the change of the decorative symbol) Is changed and displayed, but when any of the mode change effect, the mode change suggestion effect, and the pseudo continuous change time effect is executed for the hold display, the hold display is held when it is shifted and displayed. After maintaining and displaying the display mode (after digesting the hold and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern), the hold display mode is changed and displayed in any of the executed effects. There is.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the mode change effect execution process executed in step S1412 of the hold notice effect execution process, when the mode change effect is executed for the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , Control that assigns multiple timings (three times in this example) that enable the mode of the hold display to be changed in the mode change effect, and determines how to change the mode of the hold display at each timing. I do. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed because the hold notice execution flag is set (step S1501). Then, when it is determined in step S1501 that the hold notice effect is being executed (YES), whether or not the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, changes based on the hold notice pattern. (Step S1502).

Further, when it is determined in step S1502 that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern (YES), the change in the mode of the hold display is performed. After selecting the mode change effect determination table (step S1503), the selected mode change effect determination table is compared with the mode change effect determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mode change effect determination table is set. The type of the mode change effect pattern is determined (step S1504). Then, the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is set as the execution target of the mode change effect, and when the hold display is shifted and displayed, the hold display mode is maintained and displayed (the hold is digested and the decorative pattern is displayed). (After starting the variable display of), the mode change effect is executed for the hold display, and the mode of the hold display can be changed within the mode change effect, based on the mode change effect pattern. It is displayed so that the mode of the hold display changes (step S1505).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1501 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (NO), or when the mode of the hold display which is the execution target of the hold notice effect changes in step S1502 based on the hold notice pattern. If it is determined that there is no (NO), one of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set as the execution target of the mode change effect, but at the timing when the mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, even if the mode change effect is executed for the hold display, the mode of the hold display does not change. That is, when the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is shifted and displayed, the mode of the hold display is maintained and displayed (after the hold is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started), and then the hold is displayed. By executing the mode change effect on the display, the effect as if the mode of the hold display is changed (mode change effect Gase) is executed, but the mode of the hold display can be changed within the mode change effect. It is displayed so that the mode of the hold display does not change at the timing of three times (step S1506).

In the present embodiment, when the mode change effect is not executed for all the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main display is during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display). Each of the hold displays is fixedly displayed at a predetermined position (in this example, below the display area) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, when the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the execution of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is started. At times, after each hold display is fixedly displayed at a predetermined position (in this example, below the display area) in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed. During the execution of the variable display), the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is moved to the vicinity of the central portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the effect of recognizing whether or not the mode of the hold display changes. Is running. Of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the pending display of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) and the standby display of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) It is possible to execute the mode change effect for both the hold display at the time of execution and the hold display at the time of execution. Specifically, in the mode change effect, the first change position, the second change position, and the third change are the positions where the mode of the hold display can be changed in the vicinity of the central portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A position is provided so that the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, moves in order from the predetermined position to the first change position → the second change position → the third change position, and then to the predetermined position. It is displayed to go back. In this way, by executing the mode change effect for the hold display, when the hold display moves from a predetermined position, three timings for changing the mode of the hold display are given. It is possible to draw attention to the player with expectation as to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes.

The above-mentioned mode change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 so that the mode change of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern is executed during the execution of the mode change effect for the hold display. This is a table used to determine the type of the set mode change effect pattern. For example, when the mode of the hold display changes from white to ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, that is, when hold 1 is lit (hold number = 1), hold notice pattern number 6 is white → ladybug pattern. When changing, when hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2), white of hold notice pattern number 8 → Ladybug When pattern changes, when hold 3 is lit (number of hold = 3), white of hold notice pattern number 11 → ladybug When the pattern is changed, when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the white color of the hold notice pattern number 11 → When the ladybug pattern is changing, 15 types of mode change effect patterns are shown as shown in FIG. The mode change effect determination table in which is set is used. In these mode change effect patterns, each time the hold display during execution of the mode change effect moves from a predetermined position in order from the first change position → the second change position → the third change position, the mode of the hold display Is set, and the mode of the hold display at the final third change position is the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern (in FIG. 167, the ladybug pattern). Is set to. In the present embodiment, when the mode change effect is executed, the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is at a predetermined position at the start of execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol). During execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), when the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, moves from a predetermined position, the mode change effect pattern is displayed. It is possible to change the mode of the hold display based on the above, but even at the start of execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), the mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the mode change effect is predetermined. It may be possible to change at the position of.

As with the hold notice pattern, the mode change effect pattern does not change in the order of white (basic color) → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern (that is, big hit expectation). It is set so that the degree does not decrease), and each time the hold display during execution of the mode change effect moves the position, the hold display mode is maintained or the mode with high jackpot expectation is high. It is set. Therefore, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode having a low expectation of a big hit, the mode of the hold display is the expectation of a big hit until the three timings in which the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect is completed. There is a possibility that the mode will change to a higher mode, and it is possible to pay attention to the mode of the pending display during the execution of the mode change effect with expectation until the end.

In addition, as with the hold notice pattern, the mode change effect pattern does not necessarily have to change the mode of the hold display in the order of white (basic color) → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern, and the mode in the middle is changed. It is also set to change to the next mode without going through (for example, it changes from white to a ladybug pattern at the third timing according to the mode change effect pattern number 1). Therefore, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode with a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which mode the next mode will change during the execution of the mode change effect, and the mode change effect cannot be predicted. It is possible to pay attention to the mode of the pending display in the above with expectation until the end.

In the present embodiment, when the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display). During the execution of, the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is displayed so as to move in order from a predetermined position to the first change position → the second change position → the third change position. Then, by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display is displayed so as to return to a predetermined position, but it is continuously displayed in the next variable display of the decorative symbol. When it is determined that the mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display moved from the predetermined position may be displayed so as not to return to the predetermined position again. When the mode change effect is executed in this way, after the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, moves from a predetermined position, the effect of whether or not the hold display returns to the predetermined position is executed. The embodiment described in the above will be described below.

Specifically, before executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the mode change effect (the above-mentioned mode change effect Gase) is applied to any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is decided whether or not to execute the mode change effect, but in addition, when the mode change effect is executed, the mode change effect is displayed in the next variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol). It is determined whether or not the mode of the hold display to be executed is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern. Then, in the next variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), when it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern, When the mode change effect is executed, the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, moves from a predetermined position in order from the first change position → the second change position → the third change position, and then moves to the predetermined position. It is decided that the effect of being displayed so as not to return is executed with a predetermined probability.

For example, when the hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 5 when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2) are determined as the hold notice pattern, the mode change effect is executed for the hold display when the white → blue changes. In that case, since it is decided that the mode of the hold display will change from blue to green or red in the next variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), it will be suspended in the mode change effect. The effect that the display does not return to a predetermined position can be executed with a predetermined probability.

When the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by being determined as described above, the execution target of the mode change effect is The hold display is moved from a predetermined position in order from the first change position → the second change position → the third change position, but the hold is held by the end of the change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol). If the display does not return to the specified position, the mode of the hold display that is continuously displayed in the next variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) changes to a mode with high expectation of big hit. It will be decided to do. Therefore, when the mode change effect is executed for the hold display, not only attention is paid to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes when the hold display moves from a predetermined position. It is possible to draw attention to the player with expectation as to whether or not the hold display returns to a predetermined position. Further, even if the mode change effect is executed for the hold display and the mode of the hold display is changed to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is low, the expectation of a big hit cannot be increased, but the hold display is displayed. By not returning to the predetermined position, it is possible to raise the expectation that the next decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) may change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit. As described above, in the next variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change effect, is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern. In the case where the hold display returns to the predetermined position in the mode change effect, since it is determined to execute the effect of being displayed so as not to return to the predetermined position with a predetermined probability. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display that is continuously displayed may change in the next variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), and the variable display of the next decorative symbol (variable display of the next decorative symbol). In the variable display of the special symbol), it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes.

In addition, among the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when the mode change effect is executed for the hold display in standby of the change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), the mode change effect is executed. Since the hold display is continuously displayed in the next change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), the hold display may not return to the predetermined position in the mode change effect, while the decoration When the mode change effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the change display of the symbol (variation display of the special symbol), the change display of the decorative symbol ends and the hold display is also deleted. In the mode change effect, the hold display may not return to a predetermined position. In addition, when the hold display does not return to the predetermined position in the mode change effect, the mode of the hold display that is continuously displayed in the next change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is a big hit. It has been decided that the mode will change to a highly expected mode, but the mode of the pending display that will be continuously displayed not only in the next time but also in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) from the next time onward. However, it may be confirmed that the mode changes to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. Furthermore, if the hold display that did not return to the predetermined position in the mode change effect does not return to the predetermined position in the next variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed one after another. In the variable display (variable display of special symbols), the mode of the hold display that is continuously displayed is a mode with a high expectation of a big hit at least two ranks higher (for example, if the mode of the hold display is blue, it is red or It may be changed to a ladybug pattern), and the hold display returns to the specified position or returns depending on the status of the number of holds (change number) until the change display of the decorative pattern due to the corresponding hold display is started. The ratio of absent or absent may be different.

In addition, when the hold display does not return to the predetermined position in the mode change effect, the mode of the hold display that is continuously displayed in the next change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is a big hit. It was decided that the mode would change to a high-expectation mode, but as a hold display to change to a high-expectation mode, other than the hold display that did not return to the predetermined position, another decorative pattern was used. It may be a pending display (pending display) of the variable display (variable display of a special symbol), and any of the pending displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has a jackpot expectation degree. It may be changed to a higher aspect.

In the present embodiment, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed because the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command includes the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the result is YES in step S1410, so that in step S1412. Although the mode change effect execution process is not executed and the mode change effect is not executed, any of the hold displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is held even when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. When it is possible to execute the mode change effect on the display, and only when the "pseudo continuous variation" is executed, the mode of the hold display is changed in the mode change effect, and the "pseudo continuous variation" is not executed. In the mode change effect, the mode of the hold display does not change (execution of the mode change effect mode). By executing such a mode change effect, when the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect, it is confirmed that the "pseudo continuous variation" is executed, and the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect. If this is not done, it will be determined that the "pseudo-continuous variation" will not be executed, and the mode change effect executed for the hold display will not only change the mode of the hold display, but also It can be an effect that suggests in advance whether or not "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. An embodiment in which such an aspect change effect is executed will be described below.

Specifically, in the case of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the hold notice effect is being executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the execution target of the hold notice effect. When it is determined that the mode of the hold display is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern, after starting the change display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows, the first re-change is performed as "pseudo continuous change". (Before starting the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows again by temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol), the mode change effect is executed for the hold display. I have to. Then, in the mode change effect, as described above, three timings that enable the mode of the hold display to be changed are given, and the mode of the hold display is displayed so as to change at any of the timings. Further, in the case of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not being executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the hold notice effect is executed. If it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, is not the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern even during execution, the mode change effect is executed for the hold display. I try not to.

On the other hand, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is not executed, the hold notice effect is being executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the hold that is the execution target of the hold notice effect is being executed. When it is determined that the display mode is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern, the mode change effect is not executed for the hold display, and the change of the decorative symbol that is not "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is started. Occasionally, it is displayed so that the mode of the hold display changes. In addition, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not being executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is not executed, or the hold notice effect is displayed. When it is determined that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, is not the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern even during execution, the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. After that, before the variable display is stopped, there is a predetermined probability that the mode of the hold display is changed by executing the mode change effect for any of the hold displays (mode change effect). I'm trying to execute (Gase). Then, in the mode change effect Gase, the mode of the hold display is displayed so as not to change at the three timings at which the mode of the hold display can be changed as described above.

By determining as described above, when the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the mode change effect. When is changed, after that, by temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol, it is confirmed that the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again. In this way, when the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect, not only the change display of the decorative symbol caused by the hold display but also the change display of the decorative symbol executed when the hold display changes. However, by showing that it is a "pseudo-continuous fluctuation", it is possible to raise the expectation that it will be a big hit, and it is possible to pay particular attention to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect. Even if the mode change effect is not executed, there is still a possibility that the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again as "pseudo continuous variation", and the predetermined variation in "pseudo continuous variation" is left. By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again. However, the determination method is not limited to the above, and when any of the hold display modes displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes, a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed thereafter. Any method may be used as long as it is determined that the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is to be started again.

In addition, in the case of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", when the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is displayed. After the start, before the first re-variation is performed as "pseudo continuous variation" (before the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again by temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol). ) Not only is it possible to execute the mode change effect, but it is also possible to execute the mode change effect every time the re-variation is performed as "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and then the re-variation continues as "pseudo continuous fluctuation". Only when this is done, the mode of the hold display may be changed in the mode change effect. For example, after the first re-variation is performed as "pseudo-continuous variation", the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the mode change effect is held. When the display mode changes, the second revariation may be performed. By executing such a mode change effect, when the mode of the hold display is changed in the mode change effect, it is determined that the re-variation is subsequently performed as a "pseudo continuous variation", so that the "pseudo continuous variation" is performed. By increasing the number of re-variations of "variation", the expectation of a big hit can be increased, and it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect. Further, when the mode change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect, it is subsequently set as "pseudo continuous variation". Although it is decided that the re-variation will be performed, the pseudo-continuous variation described later is executed for the hold display (hold display caused by the "pseudo-continuous variation") at the time of executing the "pseudo-continuous variation". As a part of the time effect, an effect of whether or not the mode of the hold display changes may be executed. Even when such a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed, if the mode of the hold display changes in the pseudo continuous variation effect, it is determined that the re-variation is subsequently performed as "pseudo continuous variation". However, the details will be described in paragraphs [0807] to [0811].

As shown in FIG. 168, in the mode change suggestion effect execution process executed in step S1414 of the hold notice effect execution process, the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In some cases, it is attempted to suggest in advance how the mode of the hold display changes depending on the color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the color of any of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols) in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Controls to determine what color the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed because the hold notice execution flag is set (step S1601). Then, when it is determined in step S1601 that the hold notice effect is being executed (YES), whether or not the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, changes based on the hold notice pattern. (Step S1602).

Further, when it is determined in step S1602 that the mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice effect, is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern (YES), the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols are determined. At that time, not only is each stop symbol determined in relation to whether the lottery result is a big hit and whether the lottery result is a reach if the lottery result is lost, but at least one of the stop symbols is determined. It is determined to have a color corresponding to the mode of the pending display after the change (step S1603). Then, the hold display, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is set as the execution target of the mode change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the hold display mode is maintained and displayed when the hold display is shifted and displayed. After that, when one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display due to the mode change suggestion effect, and the decorative symbol It is displayed so that the mode of the hold display is changed so that the color becomes the same as the color of the stop symbol (step S1604).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1601 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (NO), or when the mode of the hold display which is the execution target of the hold notice effect changes in step S1602 based on the hold notice pattern. If it is determined that there is no (NO), one of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set as the execution target of the mode change suggestion effect, but the timing at which the mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, even if the mode change suggestion effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the mode of the hold display does not change. That is, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and maintaining and displaying the hold display mode when the hold display, which is the execution target of the mode change suggestion effect, is shifted and displayed, the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed. When one of the stop symbols is stopped and displayed, the mode change suggestion effect is performed so that the color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display (mode change suggestion effect). However, it is displayed so that the mode of the hold display does not change (step S1605). In this case, when determining the stop symbols of a plurality of decorative symbols, it is determined regardless of whether or not each stop symbol has a color corresponding to the mode of the hold display, and the lottery result is a big hit. It is decided only in relation to whether or not there is, and whether or not to reach if the lottery result is lost.

As described above, when the mode change suggestion effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. The effect is performed so as to suggest in advance how the mode of the hold display changes depending on the color of (one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols). Of the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the pending display of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) and the standby display of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) It is possible to execute the mode change suggestion effect for both the hold display at the time of execution and the hold display. Specifically, the number symbols "1" to "9" are prepared as a plurality of decorative symbols, and the number symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue, and "1" and "5". The number symbols of "9" are green, and the number symbols of "3" and "7" are red. That is, among the blue, green, red, and ladybug patterns, which are colors that can be changed from white (basic color) as the mode of hold display, the decorative patterns corresponding to blue are "2", "4", "6", and " The blue number symbols of "8", the green number symbols of "1", "5" and "9" as the decorative symbols corresponding to the green, and the red number symbols of "3" and "7" as the decorative symbols corresponding to the red color, respectively. It is prepared. The number of colors of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is configured to be smaller than the number of colors of the hold display mode, but the same number of colors as the number of colors of the hold display mode may be prepared. For example, white is not prepared as the color of the decorative symbol, but even if the mode of the hold display is changed (maintained) to white by the white of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol due to the mode change suggestion effect, the white (basic color) is still used. Since the jackpot expectation is low, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to have any expectations.

When the mode of the hold display that changes based on the hold notice pattern is blue, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the mode of the hold display after the change (at least one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols). As the stop symbol), one of the blue number symbols of "2", "4", "6", and "8" is determined, and one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols is blue. When the numerical symbol is stopped and displayed, the blue color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display by the mode change suggestion effect, and the mode of the hold display is changed to blue. In addition, when the mode of the hold display that changes based on the hold notice pattern is green, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the mode of the hold display after the change (at least one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols). As the stop symbol), one of the green number symbols "1", "5", and "9" is determined, and one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols is the green number symbol. When the stop display is displayed, the green color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display by the mode change suggestion effect, and the mode of the hold display changes to green. When the mode of the hold display that changes based on the hold notice pattern is red, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the mode of the hold display after the change (at least one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols). As the stop symbol), one of the red number symbols of "3" and "7" was determined, and one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols was stopped and displayed with the red number symbol. At that time, the red color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display by the mode change suggestion effect, and the mode of the hold display is changed to red.

In this way, regarding how the mode of the hold display changes, the color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (at least one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols) is used in advance by the mode change suggestion effect. By making it possible to suggest to, even if the lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of a plurality of decorative symbols, the mode of the hold display is changed by the mode change suggestion effect. You can make the player expect to do it. For example, when one of the stop symbols of a plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a red number symbol, the mode of the hold display may change to red, which has a high expectation of a big hit, due to the mode change suggestion effect. , It is possible to draw attention to the player with expectation as to whether or not the mode change suggestion effect is executed.

If the mode of the hold display that changes based on the hold notice pattern is a ladybug pattern, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the mode of the hold display after the change (among the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols). As at least one of the stop symbols), a decorative symbol with a ladybug pattern, which normally does not appear, appears. Then, when one of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol of the ladybug pattern, the ladybug pattern of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the mode of pending display by the mode change suggestion effect. It affects and changes the mode of the hold display to a ladybug pattern.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect execution process executed in step S1416 of the hold notice effect execution process, the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command includes "pseudo continuous variation". When the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, every time the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the jackpot expectation degree for the fluctuation display including the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is suggested. Control is performed to determine how to change the mode of the hold display to be performed (hereinafter, referred to as "the mode of the hold display at the time of executing" pseudo continuous fluctuation "). Further, in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", after the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again on the condition that the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. However, when temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol, the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is temporarily deleted, and the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again. In that case, it is possible to make the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" appear again, and to change the mode of the hold display when the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" appears again. The effect at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold notice execution flag is set for the hold to be digested this time, that is, whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed (step S1701). Then, when it is determined in step S1701 that the hold notice effect is being executed for the hold to be digested this time (YES), the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is the execution target of the hold notice effect. It is determined whether or not the mode of the hold display is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern (step S1702).

Further, when it is determined in step S1702 that the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" (the mode of the hold display which is the execution target of the hold notice effect) is the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern. (YES), after selecting the effect determination table at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation according to the change in the mode of the hold display and the number of re-variations of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" set in the fluctuation pattern (step S1703). , The selected pseudo continuous fluctuation effect determination table is compared with the pseudo continuous variation effect determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the pseudo continuous variation effect determination table set in the pseudo continuous variation effect determination table is compared. The type of is determined (step S1704). Then, the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" (the hold display that is the execution target of the hold notice) is set as the execution target of the pseudo continuous change time effect, and the "pseudo continuous change" is started as the change display of the decorative symbol. , When the hold display is shifted and displayed, the mode of the hold display is maintained and displayed, and then every time the change display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again in the "pseudo continuous change", the effect at the time of the pseudo continuous change is produced. Based on the pattern, the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed so as to change (step S1705).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1701 that the hold notice effect is not being executed for the hold to be digested this time (NO), or in step S1702, the mode of hold display when "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed (hold notice effect). When it is determined that the timing of the hold display, which is the execution target of the above, is not the timing to change based on the hold notice pattern (NO), "pseudo continuous change" is executed as the change display of the decorative symbol. Since it is determined that the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" does not change, it is assumed that the pseudo continuous change time effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous change". However, the mode of the hold display does not change. That is, after starting "pseudo continuous fluctuation" as a variation display of the decorative symbol and shifting and displaying the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous variation", the mode of the hold display is maintained and displayed. The effect at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed for the hold display, but the mode of the hold display is displayed so as not to change every time the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns is started again in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" (. Step S1706).

In the present embodiment, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the pseudo continuous fluctuation time effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is performed. At the start of execution of the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns, a hold display during execution of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed at a predetermined position (in this example, below the display area) in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Although it is displayed, when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is temporarily deleted. Then, on the condition that the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, when the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again, a position different from the predetermined position in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (book). In the example, from above the display area), the hold display at the time of execution of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is made to appear again, and then it is displayed so as to return to a predetermined position. In addition, each time the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again in the "pseudo continuous variation", the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous variation" changes based on the effect pattern at the time of the pseudo continuous variation. It is possible. In this way, by executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. Since the hold display of is once deleted, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" changes.

The above-mentioned pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a hold display based on the hold notice pattern in the pseudo-continuous change effect for the hold display when the "pseudo-continuous variation" is executed. It is a table used for determining the type of the effect pattern at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation set so that the change of the aspect of is executed. For example, in the "pseudo-continuous variation", the number of times the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again (the number of re-variations) is one, and the mode of the pending display at the time of executing the "pseudo-continuous variation" is , When it is the timing to change from white to ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, that is, when hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), hold notice pattern number 6 is white → when the ladybug pattern changes, hold 2 is lit. Hold notice pattern number 8 white at time (hold number = 2) → hold when ladybug pattern changes, hold notice pattern number 11 white when hold 3 lights up (hold number = 3) → hold when ladybug pattern changes When the white color of the hold notice pattern number 11 when 4 lights are lit (number of holds = 4) → when the ladybug pattern changes, as shown in FIG. 170 (A), one type of pseudo continuous fluctuation effect pattern is used. The set pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect determination table is used. In this pseudo continuous fluctuation effect pattern, when the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is temporarily deleted and the hold display appears again with the first re-variation, which mode of the hold display is It is set how to change, and the mode of the hold display in the final first re-variation is the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern (in FIG. 170 (A), the ladybug pattern). It is set to be.

Further, for example, in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the number of times the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again (the number of re-variations) is 2, and the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous variation" is displayed. When the mode is the timing at which the white pattern changes to the ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), the pseudo continuous time in which five types of pseudo continuous fluctuation effect patterns are set. A production decision table is used. In these pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect patterns, the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo-continuous fluctuation" is temporarily deleted, and when the hold display appears again with the first and second re-variations, the hold display is displayed. How the mode changes is set, and the mode of the hold display in the final second revariation is the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern (in FIG. 170 (B), the ladybug It is set to be (pattern). Further, for example, in the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation", the number of times the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again (the number of re-variations) is three, and the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo-continuous variation" is displayed. When the mode is the timing at which the white pattern changes to the ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, as shown in FIG. 170 (C), 15 types of pseudo continuous fluctuation effect patterns are set. A time production decision table is used. In these pseudo continuous fluctuation effect patterns, the hold display at the time of execution of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is temporarily deleted, and when the hold display appears again with the first, second, and third re-variations, the hold display is held. How the display mode changes is set, and the mode of the hold display in the final third revariation is the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern (in FIG. 170 (C), the mode of the hold display is set. It is set to be a ladybug pattern). In the present embodiment, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. At the start of execution of the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns in "", the mode of the hold display at the time of execution of the "pseudo continuous variation" does not change at a predetermined position, and the revariation occurs in the "pseudo continuous variation". When the hold display appears again, the mode of the hold display can be changed based on the effect pattern at the time of pseudo continuous change, but the change display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows in the "pseudo continuous change". It may be possible to change the mode of the hold display at the time of execution of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" at a predetermined position even at the start of execution of

In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect pattern, the mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white (basic color) → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern, as in the hold notice pattern (that is,). It is set so that the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and every time the hold display appears again with the re-variation in "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the mode of the hold display is maintained or the jackpot expectation is maintained. It is set to have a high aspect. Therefore, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in the mode of low expectation of big hit, the mode of hold display can be changed to the mode of high expectation of big hit as long as the re-variation in "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is repeated. The nature remains, and it is possible to pay attention to the mode of the hold display at the time of execution of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" with expectation until the end.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the mode of the hold display in the order of white (basic color) → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern, as in the hold notice pattern. It is also set to change to the next mode without going through the mode (in FIG. 170 (C), for example, the effect pattern number 1 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation changes from white to a ladybug pattern in the third re-variation). Has been done. Therefore, even if the mode of the hold display is displayed in the mode with low expectation of big hit, it is possible to predict which mode the next mode will change with the re-variation in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation". Instead, it is possible to pay attention to the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" with expectation until the end.

In the present embodiment, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, each time the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again, the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed based on the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect pattern. It is possible to change the mode of the hold display of. However, even if the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" changes, the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings is not always started again after that, and the number of re-variations does not increase, which is a big hit. Expectations may not rise. On the other hand, when the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" changes, the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is always started again by temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol. However, an embodiment in which such a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed will be described below.

Specifically, in the case of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", when the pseudo continuous fluctuation time effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the pseudo continuous fluctuation time is performed in step S1704. The effect pattern during pseudo continuous fluctuation is determined from the effect determination table, and at that time, the pseudo continuous variation is set so that the mode of the hold display does not change in the final re-variation as the effect pattern during pseudo continuous change. The time production pattern is decided. That is, when the number of times (the number of re-variations) that the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again in the "pseudo-continuous variation" is 1, it is held again at least with the final first re-variation. When the display appears, the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect pattern set so that the mode of the hold display does not change is determined, and if the number of re-variations of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is 2, at least the final When the hold display reappears with the second re-variation, the pseudo-continuous change effect pattern set so that the mode of the hold display does not change is determined, and the "pseudo-continuous change" re-variation. When the number of times is three, when the hold display appears again at least with the final third re-variation, the mode of the hold display is set so as not to change. Has been decided.

For example, in the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation", the number of times the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again (the number of re-variations) is 2, and the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo-continuous variation" , When it is the timing to change from white to ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, the final second re-variation out of the five types of pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect patterns shown in FIG. 170 (B). It is possible to determine the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect pattern number 5 in which the mode of the hold display does not change with the ladybug pattern. When the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect is executed based on the pseudo-continuous variation effect pattern number 5, the hold display mode changes from white to the ladybug pattern in the first re-variation, and then the second time. Re-variation of is being executed.

Further, for example, in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the number of times that the fluctuation display of the plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again (the number of re-variations) is three times, and the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed. When the mode is the timing when the pattern changes from white to ladybug pattern based on the hold notice pattern, the final third of the 15 types of pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect patterns shown in FIG. 170 (C). It is possible to determine the effect pattern numbers 5, 9, 12, 14, and 15 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, in which the mode of the hold display does not change due to the re-variation in the ladybug pattern. When the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed based on the pseudo continuous variation effect pattern numbers 5, 9, 12, 14, 15 and the mode of the hold display is changed by the first and second re-variations. Is always followed by a revariation.

When the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is changed by the determination as described above, after that, a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed to display a plurality of decorative symbol rows again. It will be confirmed that the variable display will be started. In this way, when the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" changes, not only the expectation of becoming a big hit is raised by the changed mode of the hold display, but also a plurality of decorative symbol sequences are repeated thereafter. By confirming that the fluctuation display of "Pseudo continuous fluctuation" will be started, the expectation that it will be a big hit can be raised by increasing the number of re-variations of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and the hold display at the time of execution of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" Particular attention can be paid to whether it changes. Further, for example, even if the mode of the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is changed, if the change display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns is not started again after that, the changed hold is performed. Although the expectation of becoming a big hit increases depending on the display mode, by not starting the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows again after that, the increased expectation will be rapidly lowered, but after that, multiple By confirming that the variable display of the decorative symbol sequence of is started, there is no such decrease in expectation, and the expectation of becoming a big hit can be synergistically increased. Even if the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" does not change, there is a possibility that the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows will be started again after that, and the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" remains. By temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol in "", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not to start the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows again. However, it is not necessary to be limited to the above-mentioned determination method, and when the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" changes, after that, a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed to perform a plurality of times again. Any method may be used as long as it is determined to confirm that the variable display of the decorative symbol sequence of is started.

Next, a specific example of the effect of executing the mode change effect on the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 171. In this effect example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the digestion of the hold, the hold notice effect is being executed for the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the hold notice is being executed. It shows a case where it is decided to execute the mode change effect by the timing when the mode of the hold display changes from white (basic color) to the ladybug pattern based on the pattern. Further, in the mode change effect, the mode of the hold display is white (basic color) based on the mode change effect pattern number 1 in the mode change effect determination table illustrated in FIG. 167 at three timings when the mode of the hold display changes. ) → White → White → Shows the case where it is determined to change to a ladybug pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the start condition for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied, all the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are shifted. At the same time as displaying, the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. In that case, the hold display for starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (the hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) is displayed as a predetermined position in the lower center portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is. Further, in FIG. 171 (A), the mode of the hold display at a predetermined position (hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol) is displayed in white, which is the basic color, and is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It has come to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the started decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (B), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, when the execution of the mode change effect is started with respect to the hold display at the time of executing the variation display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is performed. Is displayed as if it jumps up from the predetermined position and above the display area. After that, in the vicinity of the central portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol moves downward while bouncing in the left-right direction of the display area three times. When the hold display bounces, the mode of the hold display can be changed. Regarding the hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, in addition to the mode change effect being executed near the center of the display area, it is more than when it is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area. Whether the mode of the hold display changes in the mode change effect by displaying the hold display so that the size of the hold display is larger when the hold display is displayed so as to bounce near the center of the display area. It makes it easier to pay attention to. Further, in the vicinity of the central portion of the display area, the decorative symbols are displayed in a semi-transparent mode as the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuates at high speed, and when the mode change effect is executed, the decorative symbols are displayed. , By moving the hold display on which the mode change effect is executed so as to cross the front surface of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, what kind of stop symbol the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed? Even the player who is paying attention can pay attention to the hold display on which the mode change effect is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (C), as the first timing in which the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol can be changed, the hold toward the left side of the display area is performed. The display is displayed so as to bounce to the right at the first change position, but the mode of the hold display remains white at the first change position and is displayed so as not to change. Further, as shown in FIG. 171 (D), as the second timing in which the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol can be changed, the hold display directed to the right of the display area is the second. It is displayed so as to bounce to the left at the two change positions, but as with the first timing, the mode of the hold display remains white at the second change position and is displayed so as not to change. Further, as shown in FIG. 171 (E), as the third timing in which the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol can be changed, the hold display directed to the left of the display area is the third. It is displayed so as to bounce to the right at the three change positions, but at the third change position, the mode of the hold display is displayed so as to change from white to a ladybug pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (F), after the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol changes to the ladybug pattern, the hold display returns to the predetermined position in the mode of the ladybug pattern. Is displayed.

In this effect example, the hold display that has been moved from the predetermined position in the mode change effect is displayed so as to return to the predetermined position by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol). However, as described above, in the mode change effect, the effect that the hold display does not return to a predetermined position may be executed. In this case, after the hold display moves to the third change position in the mode change effect, the hold display is displayed so as to stay at the third change position, but the hold display is also displayed in the next change display of the decorative symbol. By continuously displaying the display at the third change position, it is confirmed that the mode of the hold display changes to the mode with high expectation of big hit. In such an effect, the hold display does not have to return to a predetermined position in the mode change effect, and the position where the hold display is continuously displayed may be a position different from the third change position. .. However, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the position (area) where the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is set to a different position, and what kind of stop symbol the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is. It is desirable that it does not get in the way when visually recognizing. Further, when the hold display is displayed so as to stay at the third change position in the mode change effect, for example, a semi-transparent hold display (dummy display) is displayed at a predetermined position to display the main liquid crystal. It is desirable to make it easy to determine which of the hold displays displayed on the display device 1600 is still moving. Further, the timing of displaying the semi-transparent hold display at a predetermined position is not when the hold display is displayed so as to stay at the third change position in the mode change effect, but when the hold display is displayed at the predetermined position in the mode change effect. It may be when moving from.

Further, in this effect example, among the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the mode change effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the change display of the decorative symbol, but the change of the decorative symbol is executed. The mode change effect may be executed for the hold display waiting for display (before execution). Further, in this effect example, in the case of executing the mode change effect for the hold display, the mode is performed after the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started and before the variable display reaches the reach. The change effect is executed, but it may be before the variation display ends (stops). For example, after the variation display reaches the reach, the mode of the hold display can be changed. The mode change effect may be executed. In addition, after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes reach, the mode change effect is executed for the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the reach effect (for example, normal reach). Only when the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command includes a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a strong SP reach other than a specific one or a specific strong SP reach), the mode of the hold display by the mode change effect May be determined to change. In such a case, after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes reach, when the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol is changed by the mode change effect during the execution of the reach effect (for example, normal reach). After that, a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a strong SP reach other than a specific one or a specific strong SP reach) is executed, and a hold display at the time of executing a variable display of a decorative symbol in a mode change effect. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the aspect of the above changes.

Next, a specific example of the effect of executing the mode change suggestion effect on the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In this effect example, among the pending displays (before execution) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the hold notice effect is being executed for the hold display when hold 1 is lit, and based on the hold notice pattern. It shows a case where it is decided to execute the mode change suggestion effect by the timing when the mode of the hold display changes from white (basic color) to red. Further, in the mode change suggestion effect, when determining the stop symbol of a plurality of decorative symbols, as the stop symbol of the right decorative symbol, the mode of the hold display is changed to red. Indicates the case where the red number symbol is determined.

First, as shown in FIG. 172 (A), when the start condition for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied, all the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are shifted. At the same time as displaying, the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. In that case, the hold display for starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (the hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) is displayed as a predetermined position in the lower center portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. At the same time, the hold display while waiting (before execution) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, the hold display at 1 o'clock on hold is displayed as a predetermined position to the right of the hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. Has been done. Further, in FIG. 172 (A), the mode of the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in white, which is the basic color, with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbol started by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the hold display at the position to the right of it (the hold display while waiting for the variable display of the decorative pattern) is displayed in white, which is also the basic color, and the next time on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It has come to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative pattern starting in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), any one of the characters displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed by displaying the characters "hold change chance" in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600. It indicates that the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display. That is, in the mode change suggestion effect, how the mode of the hold display changes depending on the color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the color of any of the stop symbols of the plurality of decorative symbols) in the variable display of the decorative symbol in advance. As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, what color of the stop symbol is used to stop and display the decorative symbol, and which of the multiple decorative symbols is stopped, the color of the stop symbol is the mode of the pending display. It is possible to pay attention to whether it affects the mode of the hold display among the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, after a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started, as the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol. The green number symbol of "1" is stopped and displayed, but when the stopped symbol of the decorative symbol on the left is stopped and displayed, the green color of the stopped symbol does not affect the mode of the hold display, and the mode of the hold display. Is displayed so that it does not change. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), after the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the red number symbol of "7" is stopped as the stop symbol of the right decorative symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. However, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the right is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E), the red color of the stopped symbol shifts toward the waiting display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (F), the mode of the pending display of the variable display of the decorative symbol changes from white to red due to the red color of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the right, so that the hold display is displayed. The aspect is displayed so as to be red.

In this effect example, among the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display during standby (before execution) of the variation display of the decorative symbol. , The mode change suggestion effect may be executed for the hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in this production example, after the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started, the decorative symbol on the left, the decorative symbol on the right, and the decorative symbol in the middle are stopped and displayed in this order. In the case of executing the change suggestion effect, when the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect is executed so that the color of the stopped symbol of the right decorative symbol affects the mode of the hold display, but the left It may be executed so that the color of the decorative symbol in or the decorative symbol in is affected by the mode of the hold display, and the decorative symbol on the left is stopped and displayed at the stage where the decorative symbol is stopped or the decorative symbol in the inside is stopped. The effect may be executed at the stage (the stage where all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed). In addition, when the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display, when the colors of the stop symbols of the left and right decorative symbols are aligned at the stage where the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the color of the stop symbol is changed. When the effect is executed so as to affect the mode of the hold display, or when all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the colors of the stopped symbols of all the decorative symbols are aligned, the color of the stopped symbol is held. The effect may be executed so as to affect the mode of display. In addition, when the mode change suggestion effect is executed for the hold display, when all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the color of any of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is stopped. May be executed, and a fanning effect may be executed in which the color of the selected stop symbol affects the mode of the hold display.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation", it is preferable to execute the mode change suggestion effect for the hold display. The fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern determined with the highest probability when the lottery result is lost, and is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol of a decorative symbol that does not reach. In such a case, for example, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, the characters "hold change chance" shown in FIG. 172 (B) are displayed to suggest a mode change for any of the hold displays. When it is indicated that the effect is to be executed, the variable display does not reach, so it is possible to concentrate on what color of the stop symbol the decorative symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. become able to. Further, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is not the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation", it is preferable to execute the mode change suggestion effect for the hold display. The fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern determined when the number of holdings is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, and the effect content is the same as the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". , The fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". When such a fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation" is executed, for example, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, the characters "pending change chance" shown in FIG. 172 (B) are displayed. Even if it is shown that the mode change suggestion effect is executed for any of the hold displays, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in what color as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol because the fluctuation time is short. This is because I don't have time to enjoy Ruka. Further, when the variation pattern of "shortening variation" is executed, the mode change suggestion effect may be executed for the hold display, but the mode change suggestion effect is executed for such a hold display. It is preferable not to indicate it in advance.

Next, a specific example of the effect when the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed for the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. In this effect example, when "pseudo continuous variation" is executed as a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows, the hold notice effect is being executed for the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous variation", and , It is determined that the mode of the hold display changes from white (basic color) to red based on the hold notice pattern, and the case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation time effect is executed is shown. Further, the number of re-variations of the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation" is one, and in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation time effect, when the fluctuation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings is started again in the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation", the pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs. An example shows a case where the mode of the hold display is determined to change from white (basic color) to red based on the effect pattern at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation determined using the effect determination table.

First, as shown in FIG. 173 (A), when the start condition for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied, all the hold displays displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are shifted. At the same time as displaying, the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. In that case, the hold display for starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (the hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) is displayed as a predetermined position in the lower center portion of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is. Further, in FIG. 173 (A), the mode of the hold display at a predetermined position (hold display at the time of executing the variable display of the decorative symbol) is displayed in white, which is the basic color, and is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It has come to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the started decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, "1" is set as the left decorative symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time after the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started. The number symbol of, the number symbol of "7" as the decorative symbol on the right, and the decorative symbol drawn as "pseudo-ren" as the decorative symbol inside are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the decorative symbol inside is "pseudo-ren". When the decorative symbol drawn as is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation". You can recognize that. Further, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), when the decorative symbol drawn as "pseudo-ream" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol inside, it is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area. The pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed so that the hold display at the time of execution of "continuous fluctuation" is temporarily erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600, a plurality of decorative symbols drawn as "pseudo-ream" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols inside. The variable display of the decorative pattern sequence of is started. At that time, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed so as to appear in the upper center portion of the display area. By displaying at a position different from the predetermined position (the position before erasing the hold display), it is easy to pay attention to whether or not the mode of the hold display changes in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. Further, when the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" appears again, the mode of the hold display can be changed, and in FIG. 173 (E), the mode of the hold display is white → It is displayed so that it turns red. After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (F), the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is moved toward a predetermined position which is the lower center portion of the display area, and the hold display is red. It is displayed so as to return to a predetermined position in the embodiment. Further, in the vicinity of the central portion of the display area, the decorative symbols are displayed in a semi-transparent manner as the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuates at high speed, and when "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. When the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns is started again, the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" appears again in a position different from the predetermined position in the display area, and is predetermined. Although it is moved to return to the position of, the hold display is moved so as to cross the front of the decorative symbol being displayed in the variable display, so that the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at what kind of stop symbol. Even a player who is paying attention to whether or not (whether or not "pseudo continuous fluctuation" continues) can pay attention to the hold display.

In this production example, when "pseudo continuous variation" is executed as a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings, when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is held when "pseudo continuous variation" is executed. When the display is once erased and the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol columns is started again, the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed again, but such a "pseudo" is displayed. The period for hiding the hold display at the time of executing "continuous fluctuation" may be slightly changed. For example, after temporarily stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol, the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is displayed. After erasing once and starting the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol columns again, the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous variable" may be displayed so as to appear again. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, even after starting the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows again, the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" remains deleted (when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed. It may be possible to determine that the lottery result is a big hit by setting (the hold display of) does not appear. In this way, even if the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is not displayed after the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed, The hold display at the time of execution of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, when "pseudo continuous variation" is executed as the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol sequences, when the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol sequences is started again, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. At a position different from the predetermined position (in this example, above the display area), the hold display at the time of executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is made to appear again, and then it is displayed so as to return to the predetermined position. However, when the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is started again, the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" may be displayed so as to appear at a predetermined position before being erased. Good. Further, in this effect example, when "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed as a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol strings, when the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol sequences is started again, the "pseudo continuous variation" is displayed again. The hold display at the time of execution is made to appear, and when the hold display at the time of execution of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" appears again, the mode of the hold display can be changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 When the hold display at the time of executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation" reappears at a position different from the predetermined position in the display area of (in this example, above the display area), from the mode of the hold display before erasing. It may be displayed so that the mode of the hold display changes before it returns to a predetermined position without changing.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Is.

For example, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 2500 Center accessory 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Back bottom movable production unit 3110 Back bottom rear first decorative body (first decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3111 First decorative surface 3112 Second decorative surface 3114 Sub liquid crystal display device (effect display device, decorative member, decorative unit)
3115 First hinge part 3120 Back bottom rear second decorative body (second decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3121 First decorative surface 3122 Second decorative surface 3124 Second hinge part 3125 Decorative body support shaft (support shaft, decorative unit)
3126 Second decorative body side operating gear (under-axis gear, decorative unit)
3127 Bearing member 3130 Rotation drive unit 3131 Rotation drive unit base 3131a Main part 3131b Sub part 3131c Upper bearing part 3131d Lower bearing part 3132 Rotation transmission member 3132a Sleeve part 3132b Connecting part 3132c First decorative body side operating gear (on-axis gear)
3133 First drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 Back bottom rear first drive motor (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Back bottom rear second drive motor (bottom drive motor, drive motor)
3142 Unit cover 3143 Rack member 3143a Rack gear 3150 Slide unit 3151 Unit base 3152 Slide guide 3153 Transmission gear member 3154 Drive gear 3155 Back bottom rear third drive motor 3157 Slide cover

Claims (1)

Variable display means for displaying variable information of symbol information,
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers for lottery based on the establishment of starting conditions,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on a lottery random number acquired by the random number acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, and a lottery means.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit, the profit-giving state control means for controlling the profit-giving state of giving a profit to the player is provided.
In a gaming machine in which, when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit, the variable display means performs variable display of the symbol information and stops and displays specific symbol information.
From the time when the lottery random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means until the start condition is satisfied, the lottery random number is stored, and the execution of the lottery by the lottery means based on the lottery random number is performed as a predetermined upper limit. Random number storage means to wait for a number and
A hold display means for displaying the storage of the lottery random numbers by the random number storage means as a hold display in a predetermined mode, and
A variable response display means capable of displaying the hold display as a variable response display at a predetermined position in a predetermined mode when the start condition is satisfied.
The variation response notice effect that makes it possible to change the mode of the variation response display displayed by the variation response display means and can execute the variation response notice effect that suggests the expectation of the hit depending on the mode in which the variation response display mode is changed. The means of execution and
When the symbol information is variablely displayed by the variable display means, the continuous variable effect executing means capable of executing the continuous variable effect of varyingly displaying the symbol information as if the symbol information fluctuates a plurality of times. With,
The variation response notice effect is described after the display of the special display mode indicating that the continuous variation effect execution means is determined to execute the continuous variation effect during the execution of the variation display of the symbol information is started. When the variation-corresponding display displayed by the variation-corresponding display means is made unrecognizable and the unrecognizable variation-corresponding display is recognized again, the variation-corresponding display that was displayed before the unrecognizable display is displayed. displayed on the predetermined position in the same manner as embodiment of a first pattern that will be capable of displaying the display of different aspects at the predetermined position and of identity Ji manner after it has been displayed in of identity Ji manner, the The first aspect in which the variation-corresponding display displayed at a predetermined position can be changed to a different aspect without making the variation-corresponding display displayed by the variation-corresponding display means unrecognizable. a different second pattern 1 pattern, there is, display of the different embodiments are viewable in said first pattern, and also displayed on the display of the different embodiments are viewable in the second pattern Has been
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first pattern, there are a plurality of periods during which the fluctuation-corresponding display displayed by the variation-corresponding display means is unrecognizable.